776087

Olympus E-M5 Mark III Handleiding

1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/258
Pagina verder
Instruction Manual
DIGITAL CAMERA
Model No. : IM016
Table of Contents
Feature Index
1. Preparation
2. Shooting
3. Playback
4. Menu functions
5. Connecting the camera to a
smartphone
6. Connecting the camera to a
computer
7. Cautions
8. Information
9. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
10. Additions/modifications by
firmware update
Thank you for purchasing an Olympus digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera,
please read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life.
Be sure you have read and understood the contents of “9. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, before using
this product. Keep these instructions available for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may differ from the actual product.
If there are additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, the
contents will differ. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.
2
EN
Product Manuals
Product Manuals
Indications used in this manual
The following symbols are used throughout this manual.
$Notes and other supplementary information.
%Tips and other helpful information for using the camera.
gReferences to other pages in this manual.
In addition to the “Instruction Manual”, we also offer a “Camera Function Guide”.
Consult these manuals when using the product.
Instruction Manual (this pdf)
A how-to guide to the camera and its features. The Instruction
Manual can be downloaded from the OLYMPUS website or directly
using the “OLYMPUS Image Share” (OI.Share) smartphone app.
Camera Function Guide
A function and setting guide that helps you use camera features to the full. It has been
optimized for display on mobile devices and can be viewed using OI.Share.
https://cs.olympus-imaging.jp/jp/support/cs/webmanual/index.html
3
EN
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Product Manuals 2
Before You Begin 9
Feature Index 10
Names of parts 14
1. Preparation 16
Unpacking the box contents .....16
Attaching the Strap ....................17
Charging and inserting
the battery ...................................18
Inserting the card .......................21
Attaching a lens to
the camera ..................................23
Removing Lenses .......................24
Using the monitor .......................25
Turning the camera on ...............26
Sleep Mode ..................................26
Initial setup .................................27
What to Do If You Can’t Read
the Display ..................................29
2. Shooting 30
Information displays while
shooting ......................................30
Switching between displays ......32
Switching the information
display ..........................................33
Shooting still pictures ................34
Shooting with touch screen
operations .....................................36
Letting the camera choose
aperture and shutter
speed (P: Program AE) ................37
Choosing aperture
(A: Aperture-Priority AE) ..............39
Choosing shutter speed
(S: Shutter-Priority AE) ................41
Choosing aperture and shutter
speed (M: Manual Exposure) .......43
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time) ...45
Lighten Blending (B: Live
Composite Photography)..............47
Letting the camera choose the
settings (AUTO mode) ..................49
Shooting in scene mode
(SCN mode) .................................50
Types of scene modes .................51
Using art fi lters (ART mode) ........55
Custom Mode (C mode) ...............57
Recording Movies ......................58
Recording movies in photo
shooting modes ............................58
Recording movies in movie mode
(n) ..............................................59
Silencing Camera Sounds While
Shooting Movies ...........................61
4
EN
Table of Contents
Shooting Settings .......................62
Direct Buttons ...............................63
Controlling exposure
(Exposure Compensation) ........64
Choosing an AF Target Mode
(AF Target Mode) ......................65
Choosing a Focus Target
(AF Target Point) ......................66
Face priority AF/
Eye priority AF ..........................67
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF
(Super Spot AF) ........................68
Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO) .........................................70
Locking the exposure
(AE Lock) ..................................70
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting ....................71
Self-Timer Options
(c Custom Self-timer) ............73
Shooting without the vibration
caused by shutter button
operations (Anti-Shock r) ......73
Shooting without shutter sound
(Silent s) ................................74
Shooting without a release
time lag
(Pro Capture shooting) .............74
Shooting still pictures in a
higher resolution
(High Res Shot) ........................76
The Super Control/LV Super
Control Panel ................................77
Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO) .........................................80
Choosing a focus mode
(AF Mode).................................80
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness
(Metering) .................................82
Adjusting color
(WB (white balance)) ................83
Making fi ne adjustments to
white balance
(WB Compensation) .................85
Reducing camera shake
(Image Stabilizer) .....................86
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting ....................87
Setting the image aspect ..........87
Photo File and Image Size
Options (KK) ....................... 88
Frame Size, Rate, and
Compression (nK) ............... 89
Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion
Movies (Slow- and Fast-Motion
Movies) .....................................92
Using a fl ash
(Flash photography) .................93
Choosing a Flash Mode
(Flash Mode) ............................94
Adjusting fl ash output
(Flash intensity control) ............97
Processing options
(Picture Mode) ..........................98
Adjusting overall color
(Color Creator)........................100
Making fi ne adjustments to
sharpness (Sharpness) ..........101
Making fi ne adjustments to
contrast (Contrast) ..................101
Making fi ne adjustments to
saturation (Saturation) ............101
Making fi ne adjustments to
tone (Gradation) .....................102
Applying fi lter effects to
monochrome pictures
(Color Filter)............................103
5
EN
Table of Contents
Adjusting the tone of
a monochrome image
(Monochrome Color)...............104
Adjusting i-Enhance effects
(Effect) ....................................104
Setting the color reproduction
format (Color Space) ..............105
Changing the brightness
of highlights and shadows
(Highlight&Shadow Control) ...106
Assigning functions to buttons
(Button Function) ....................107
3. Playback 114
Information display during
playback .................................... 114
Playback image information .......114
Switching the information
display ........................................115
Viewing photographs and
movies ....................................... 116
Finding Pictures Quickly (Index
and Calendar Playback) .............117
Zooming In (Playback Zoom) .....117
Rotating Pictures (Rotate) ..........117
Watching movies ........................118
Protecting Pictures (0) ...........118
Deleting Pictures (Erase) ...........119
Selecting Pictures for Sharing
(Share Order) .............................119
Selecting Multiple Pictures
(0, Erase Selected, Share
Order Selected) ..........................119
Print order (DPOF) .....................120
Adding Audio to Pictures (R) ...... 122
Playback Using Touch
Controls .....................................123
Selecting and protecting
images ........................................ 124
4. Menu functions 125
Basic menu operations ............125
Using Shooting Menu 1/
Shooting Menu 2 ......................127
Restoring Default Settings
(Reset) ........................................127
Saving Settings
(Assign to Custom Mode) ...........128
Processing options
(Picture Mode) ............................129
Photo File and Image Size
Options (KK) .........................129
Digital Zoom
(Digital Tele-converter) ...............130
Shooting automatically with a
fi xed interval
(Time lapse shooting) .................131
Varying settings over a series of
photographs (Bracketing) ...........132
Taking HDR (High Dynamic
Range) images (HDR) ................137
Recording multiple exposures in
a single image
(Multiple Exposure) ....................139
Keystone correction and
perspective control
(Keystone Comp.) ......................141
Setting anti-shock/silent shooting
(Anti-Shock r/Silent s) ..........142
Setting high resolution shooting
(High Res Shot) ..........................143
Shooting with remote control
wireless fl ash (#RC Mode) ........143
6
EN
Table of Contents
Using the Video Menu ..............144
Choosing an Exposure Mode
(n Mode (Movie Exposure
Modes)) ......................................147
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (n Flicker Scan) ..........148
Frame Size, Rate, and
Compression (nK) .................149
Sound Recording Options
(Movie R) ...................................150
Using the Olympus LS-100 IC
Recorder .....................................151
Using the Playback Menu ........153
Automatically Rotating Portrait-
Orientation Pictures for Playback
(R) ............................................153
Retouching Pictures (Edit) ..........153
Combining Pictures
(Image Overlay) ..........................155
Creating Movie Stills
(In-Movie Image Capture) ..........156
Trimming movies
(Movie Trimming) ........................157
Removing Protection from All
Pictures (Reset Protect) .............158
Cancelling a share order
(Reset share Order) ...................158
Using the setup menu ..............159
Formatting the card
(Card Setup) ...............................160
Deleting all images
(Card Setup) ...............................160
Wireless LAN Options (Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth Settings) .....................160
Using the custom menus .........161
J AF/MF ...................................161
K AF/MF ...................................162
L AF/MF ...................................163
I AF/MF ...................................163
M Button/Dial/Lever ..................164
N Release/j/
Image Stabilizer ..........................165
O Release/j/
Image Stabilizer ..........................165
P Disp/8/PC ...........................166
Q Disp/8/PC ...........................167
R Disp/8/PC ...........................168
S Disp/8/PC ...........................168
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p  ................169
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p  ................170
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p  ................170
W #Custom ..............................170
X K/WB/Color ........................171
Y Record/Erase ........................172
Z Record/Erase ........................173
a EVF .......................................173
b K Utility ...............................174
c K Utility ...............................174
Setting Focus and Exposure with
the AEL/AFL Button
(K AEL/AFL) ............................175
C-AF Tracking Sensitivity
(K C-AF Sensitivity) .................176
C-AF Starting Focus Target
(K C-AF Center Start) ..............177
C-AF Center Target Priority
(K C-AF Center Priority) ..........178
Choosing the AF Home Position
(N Set Home) ..........................179
7
EN
Table of Contents
Manual Focus Assist
(MF Assist) .................................180
Adjusting Focus During
Exposures
(Bulb/Time Focusing) .................180
Customizing the Fn Lever
(K Fn Lever Function) ..............181
Burst Shooting Options
(jL Settings/jH Settings) ....182
Reducing Flicker
(Flicker Reduction) .....................184
Choosing the control panel
displays (K Control Settings) ...186
Adding information displays
(G/Info Settings) .......................188
Choosing the Playback Zoom
Ratio (qa Default Setting) ......189
Selfi e Assist (Selfi e Assist) .........190
Viewing camera images on TV
(HDMI) ........................................ 191
Live Bulb Update Frequency
(Live Bulb) ..................................192
Live Time Update Frequency
(Live Time) ..................................192
Choosing the Shutter Speed
(Composite Settings) ..................193
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (K Flicker Scan) .........194
Shutter speeds when the fl ash
fi res (#X-Sync./#Slow Limit) ....195
Combinations of JPEG image
sizes and compression rates
(K Set) .....................................196
Saving lens info
(Lens Info Settings) ....................196
Selecting the display style of the
viewfi nder (EVF Style) ................197
Correcting Fisheye Distortion
(Fisheye Compensation) ............198
5. Connecting the camera
to a smartphone 200
Adjusting Settings for
Connection to
a Smartphone ...........................201
Wireless Settings for
When the Camera Is Off ...........202
Transferring images to
a smartphone ............................203
Automatically uploading
images while the camera
is off ...........................................204
Shooting remotely with
a smartphone ............................204
Adding position information to
images .......................................205
Resetting Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®
settings ......................................206
Changing the password ...........206
Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®  ...... 207
6. Connecting the camera
to a computer 208
Connecting the camera to
a computer ................................208
Copying pictures to
a computer ................................208
Installing the PC software .......209
8
EN
Table of Contents
7. Cautions 210
Battery and charger .................210
Using your charger abroad .....211
Usable cards .............................211
Interchangeable lenses ............212
MF Clutch Lenses .....................213
Optional Accessories ...............214
Grip (ECG-5) ..............................214
Designated External Flash
Units ...........................................215
Wireless remote control fl ash
photography ...............................216
Other external fl ash units ...........218
System chart .............................220
8. Information 222
Cleaning and storing the
camera ....................................... 222
Cleaning the camera ..................222
Storage ....................................... 222
Cleaning and checking the image
pickup device ..............................223
Pixel Mapping - Checking the
image processing functions ........223
Shooting tips and
information ................................224
Error codes ...............................227
Default Settings ........................229
Record mode and fi le size/
number of storable still
pictures .....................................241
Specifi cations ...........................243
9. SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS 246
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........246
10. Additions/modifi cations
by fi rmware update 251
Index 252
9
EN
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
Read and Follow Safety Precautions
To prevent incorrect operation resulting in fi re or other damage to property or harm to
yourself or to others, read “9. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” (P. 246) in its entirety before
using the camera.
While using the camera, consult this manual to ensure safe and correct operation. Be
sure to keep the manual in a safe place once it is read.
Olympus will not be held liable for violations of local regulations arising from use of this
product outside the country or region of purchase.
• Use of these features outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wireless
regulations; be sure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held
liable for the user’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Wireless LAN and Bluetooth®
The camera features built-in wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features
outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations; be
sure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held liable for the
user’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in areas where their use is prohibited.
g “Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®” (P. 207)
User Registration
Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on registering your OLYMPUS products.
10
EN
Feature Index
Feature g
Shooting Mode 34
Custom Mode 57
Monitor Display 33, 115
Viewfi nder Display 197
Direct Button Functions 63
Live Controls 187
LV Super Control Panel 77, 79
W Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes 127
Picture Mode 98, 129
KK88, 129
Image Aspect 87
Digital Tele-converter 130
j/Y/i (Drive Mode) 71, 73,
131
X Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing 132
HDR 137
Multiple Exposure 139
Keystone Comp. 141
Anti-Shock r/Silent s142
High Res Shot 76, 143
#RC Mode 216
n Video Menu
n Mode Settings
n Mode 147
n Flicker Scan 148
n Specifi cation Settings
nK149
n Noise Filter 144
n Picture Mode 144
Feature g
n AF/IS Settings
n AF Mode 80
n Image Stabilizer 86
n Button/Dial/Lever
n Button Function 107
n Dial Function 145
n Fn Lever Function 145
n Shutter Function 145
n Elec. Zoom Speed 145
n Display Settings
n Control Settings 146
n Info Settings 146
Time Code Settings 146
Movie R150
n HDMI Output 146
q Playback Menu
R153
Edit 153
Print Order 120
Reset Protect 158
Reset share Order 158
Device Connection 201
Feature Index
11
EN
Feature Index
Feature g
G Custom Menu
J AF/MF
K AF Mode 80
K AEL/AFL 175
AF Scanner 161
K C-AF Sensitivity 176
K C-AF Center Start 177
K C-AF Center Priority 178
K AF/MF
NMode Settings 162
AF Area Pointer 162
AF Targeting Pad 162
N Set Home 179
N Custom Settings 162
L AF/MF
AF Limiter 163
AF Illuminator 163
I Face Priority 67
AF Focus Adj. 163
I AF/MF
Preset MF distance 163
MF Assist 180
MF Clutch 163
Focus Ring 163
Bulb/Time Focusing 180
Reset Lens 163
Feature g
M Button/Dial/Lever
K Button Function 107
qR Function 164
K Dial Function 164
Dial Direction 164
K Fn Lever Function 181
Fn Lever/Power Lever 164
K Elec. Zoom Speed 164
N Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority 165
C-AF Release Priority
jL Settings 182
jH Settings
Flicker Reduction 184
O Release/j/Image Stabilizer
K Image Stabilizer 86
j Image Stabilizer 165
Half Way Rls With IS 165
Lens I.S. Priority 165
12
EN
Feature Index
Feature g
P Disp/8/PC
K Control Settings 186
G/Info Settings 188, 189
Picture Mode Settings 166
j/Y Settings 166
Multi Function Settings 166
Q Disp/8/PC
Live View Boost 167
Art LV Mode 167
LV Close Up Settings 167
qa Default Setting 189
z Settings 167
R Disp/8/PC
Grid Settings 168
Peaking Settings 168
Histogram Settings 188
Mode Guide 168
Selfi e Assist 190
S Disp/8/PC
8168
HDMI 191
USB Mode 168
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Exposure Shift 169
EV Step 169
ISO Step 169
ISO-Auto Set 169
ISO-Auto 169
K Noise Filter 169
Noise Reduct. 169
Feature g
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Bulb/Time Timer 170
Bulb/Time Monitor 170
Live Bulb 192
Live Time 192
Composite Settings 193
K Flicker Scan 194
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Metering 82
AEL Metering 170
N Spot Metering 170
W #Custom
#X-Sync. 195
#Slow Limit 195
x+F170
#+WB 170
X K/WB/Color
K Set 88, 129,
196
Pixel Count 88, 129,
196
Shading Comp. 171
WB 83
All x171
W Keep Warm Color 84
Color Space 105
13
EN
Feature Index
Feature g
Y Record/Erase
File Name 172
Edit Filename 172
dpi Settings 172
Copyright Settings 172
Lens Info Settings 196
Z Record/Erase
Quick Erase 173
RAW+JPEG Erase 173
Priority Set 173
a EVF
EVF Auto Switch 173
EVF Adjust 173
EVF Style 197
V Info Settings 173
EVF Grid Settings 173
V Half Way Level 173
S-OVF 173
b K Utility
Pixel Mapping 223
Press-and-hold Time 174
Level Adjust 174
Touchscreen Settings 174
Menu Recall 174
Fisheye Compensation 198
Feature g
c K Utility
Backlit LCD 174
Sleep 174
Auto Power Off 174
Quick Sleep Mode 174
Certifi cation 174
d Setup Menu
Card Setup 160
X27
W29
s159
Rec View 159
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings 160
Firmware 159
14
EN
Names of parts
Names of parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
0
n
o
m
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
a
b
c
d
1 Mode dial lock .................................P. 34
2 Rear dial* (o)
......................... P. 38 – 43, 113, 116, 189
3 Shutter button .................................P. 35
4 R (Movie)/H button ............P. 58/P. 119
5 F (Exposure compensation) button
................................P. 38, 40, 42, 44, 64
6 Front dial* (r)
........................... P. 38 – 43, 70, 113, 116
7 Lens attachment mark ....................P. 23
8 Preview button ..............................P. 108
9 Mount (Remove the body cap before
attaching the lens.)
0 Mode dial ........................................P. 34
a Stereo microphone ...............P. 122, 150
b ON/OFF lever ................................P. 26
c u (LV) button ...............................P. 32
d jY (Sequential shooting/Self-timer/
HDR) button ....................................P. 71
e Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator
.............................................P. 71/P. 163
f Microphone jack cover
g Remote cable terminal cover ........P. 219
h Connector cover
i Strap eyelet.....................................P. 17
j Lens release button ........................P. 24
k Lens lock pin
l Microphone jack (A commercially
available microphone can be connected.
ø3.5 stereo mini plug) ...................P. 151
m Remote cable terminal ..................P. 219
n HDMI connector (type D) ..............P. 191
o Micro-USB connector............P. 151, 208
* In this manual, the r and o icons represent operations performed using the front dial
and rear dial.
15
EN
Names of parts
4
3
7
8
9
a
0
g
d
b
c
e
f
5
6
2
1
h
i
j
k
l
m
1 Diopter adjustment dial ...................P. 32
2 Monitor (Touch screen)
......................P. 30, 32, 36, 77, 114, 123
3 Viewfi nder ...............................P. 32, 197
4 Eye sensor
5 Eyecup ..........................................P. 219
6 MENU button ...............................P. 125
7 Hot shoe .................................P. 93, 215
8 AEL/AFL / 0 (Protect) button
.....................................P. 70, 175/P. 118
9 Fn lever ...........................P. 37 – 43, 181
0 Speaker
a ISO button ..............................P. 70, 188
b INFO button ...........................P. 33, 115
c Q button ........................P. 77, 116, 125
d Arrow pad* ....................................P. 116
e q (Playback) button ....................P. 116
f (Erase) button ..........................P. 119
g CHARGE (battery charge) lamp ....P. 20
h Connector cover ...........................P. 214
i Tripod socket
j Battery compartment cover.............P. 18
k Battery compartment lock ...............P. 18
l Card compartment cover ................P. 21
m Card slot .........................................P. 21
* In this manual, the FGHI icons represent operations performed using the arrow pad.
16
EN
Preparation
1
1 Preparation
Unpacking the box contents
At purchase, the package contains the camera and the following accessories.
If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased the
camera.
Camera Body cap * EP-15 eyecup * Hot shoe cover * Strap
USB cable
CB-USB12 Flash
FL-LM3 Lithium-ion battery
BLS-50 Lithium-ion charger
BCS-5
• Warranty Card
Basic Manual
* The body cap, eyecup, and hot shoe cover attached to or inserted in the camera.
17
EN
Preparation
1
Attaching the Strap
1
Before attaching the strap, remove the end
from the keeper loop and loosen the strap
as shown.
Keeper loop
2
Pass the end of the strap through the strap eyelet and back
through the keeper loop.
3
Pass the end of the strap through the buckle and tighten as shown.
• Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet.
• After attaching the strap, pull on it fi rmly to ensure that it will not come loose.
18
EN
Preparation
1
Charging and inserting the battery
1
Charge the battery.
Charging indicator
Charging in
progress Lights orange
Charging
complete Off
Charging error Blinks orange
(Charging time: Approximately
3 hours 30 minutes)
1
2
3
AC wall outlet
Lithium ion battery
Charging
indicator
AC cable
Direction indicating
mark (C)
Lithium ion
charger
• Unplug the charger when charging is complete.
• Batteries inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is connected to an
optional USB-AC adapter. g “On-Board Charging Using an Optional USB-AC
Adapter (the F-5AC)” (P. 19)
2
Confi rm that the ON/OFF lever is in
the OFF position.
ON/OFF lever
3
Open the battery compartment cover. Battery compartment cover
1
2
Battery compartment lock
19
EN
Preparation
1
4
Loading the battery.
• Use only BLS-50 batteries
(P. 16, 245).
Direction indicating mark
5
Close the battery compartment cover.
$
• It is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case the
battery in use drains.
• Also read “Battery and charger” (P. 210).
Removing the battery
Turn off the camera before opening or closing the battery
compartment cover. To remove the battery, fi rst push the
battery lock knob in the direction of the arrow and then
remove.
• Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you
are unable to remove the battery. Do not use force.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while the
memory card access indicator (P. 31) is displayed.
On-Board Charging Using an Optional USB-AC Adapter (the F-5AC)
• Read the documentation provided with the F-5AC before use.
1
Confi rm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.
20
EN
Preparation
1
2
Confi rm that the battery is inserted in the camera.
3
Connect the camera and USB-AC adapter via
USB.
• The CHARGE lamp light during charging. Charging
takes about 4 hours. The lamp goes out as the
batteries reach full charge.
4
Charging stops when the camera is turned on.
• The USB-AC adapter cannot be used to charge the batteries when the camera is on.
• If a charging error occurs, the CHARGE lamp will blink. Disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
• USB charging is available when the battery temperature is between 0 and 40 °C.
%
• The batteries will not charge while the camera is off if pictures are being uploaded to a
smartphone via Wi-Fi (background auto upload). g “Automatically uploading images
while the camera is off” (P. 204)
$ The USB-AC Adapter
• Be sure to unplug the USB-AC adapter for cleaning. Leaving the USB-AC adapter
plugged in during cleaning could result in injury or electric shock.
21
EN
Preparation
1
Inserting the card
The camera uses third-party SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards conforming to the SD
(Secure Digital) standard. Read “Usable cards” (P. 211) before use.
1
Confi rm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.
2
Open the card compartment cover.
2
1
3
Slide the card in until it locks into place.
• Turn off the camera before loading or removing the
card.
• Do not forcibly insert a damaged or deformed card.
Doing so may damage the card slot.
Terminal area
4
Close the card compartment cover.
• Close it securely until you hear it click.
• Be sure the card compartment cover is closed before
using the camera. 2
1
• Cards must be formatted with this camera before fi rst use (P. 160).
22
EN
Preparation
1
Removing the card
Press the card in to eject it. Pull out the card.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while the memory
card access indicator (P. 31) is displayed.
23
EN
Preparation
1
Attaching a lens to the camera
1
Confi rm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.
2
Remove the rear cap of the lens
and the body cap of the camera.
12
Rear cap
2
1
3
Align the lens attachment mark (red) on the
camera with the alignment mark (red) on the
lens, then insert the lens into the camera’s
body.
Lens attachment mark
4
Rotate the lens clockwise until you hear it click
(direction indicated by arrow 3).
• Do not press the lens release button.
• Do not touch internal portions of the camera.
3
24
EN
Preparation
1
5
Remove the front lens cap.
2
1
1
1
1
2
• Before attaching or removing lenses, confi rm that the camera ON/OFF lever is in the
OFF position.
Removing Lenses
1
Confi rm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.
2
Hold the lens release button and rotate the lens as
shown.
Lens release button
1
2
Interchangeable lenses
Read “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 212).
25
EN
Preparation
1
Using the monitor
Rotate the monitor for ease of viewing. The angle of the monitor can be adjusted
according to conditions at the time of shooting.
Up to 180°
Up to 90°
Up to 270°
• Gently rotate the monitor within its range of motion. Attempting to rotate the monitor
beyond the limits shown below could damage the connectors.
• The camera can be confi gured to display a mirror image of the view through the lens or
automatically zoom power zoom lenses all the way out when the monitor is rotated for self
portraits. g “Selfi e Assist (Selfi e Assist)” (P. 190)
26
EN
Preparation
1
Turning the camera on
1
Set the ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on.
• To turn the camera off, return the lever to the OFF position.
ON/OFF lever
Monitor
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
1023
Battery level
Battery icon and battery level are displayed.
j (green): The camera is ready to shoot.
k (green): The battery is not full.
l (green): The battery is low.
m (blinks red): Charge the battery.
Sleep Mode
If no controls are used for a set period, the camera will automatically enter suspend
operation to reduce the drain on the batteries. This is referred to as “sleep mode”.
• When the camera enters sleep mode, the monitor will turn off and operation will be
suspended. Pressing the shutter or q button reactivates the camera.
• If no operations are performed for a set period after the camera enters sleep mode, the
camera will turn off automatically. The camera can be reactivated by turning it on again.
• The camera may require additional time to recover from sleep mode when [On] (enabled)
is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-off Standby]. g “Wireless Settings
for When the Camera Is Off” (P. 202)
• The delay before the camera goes to sleep or turns off automatically can be selected in
the G custom menu. At default settings, the camera will go to sleep after one minute and
turn off automatically after four hours. g [Sleep] (P. 174), [Auto Power Off] (P. 174)
27
EN
Preparation
1
Initial setup
After turning the camera on for the fi rst time, perform the initial setup by choosing a
language and setting the camera clock.
• Date and time information is recorded on the card together with the images.
• The fi le name is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set the
correct date and time before using the camera. Some functions cannot be used if the date
and time have not been set.
1
Press the Q button when the initial setup dialog is
displaying prompting you to choose a language. Please select your language.
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.
Veuillez choisir votre langue.
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.
2
Highlight the desired language using the front or
rear dial or the FGHI buttons on the arrow pad.
• The language-selection dialog has two pages of
options. Use the front or rear dial or the FGHI
buttons on the arrow pad to move the cursor between
pages.
W
Hrvatski
Dansk
Eesti
Deutsch
Indonesia
Norsk
ýHVN\
English
Suomi
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
Italiano
Latviski
Polski
Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ
Nederlands
Français
0DJ\DU
/LHWXYLǐN
Português(Pt)
Set
Cursor
W
Romanian
Español
Viet Nam
Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ
Slovensky
Svenska
Türkçe
Srpski
6ORYHQãþLQD
ɍɤɪɚʀɧɫɶɤɚ
Setare
3
Press the Q button when the desired language is
highlighted.
• If you press the shutter button before pressing the Q
button, the camera will exit to shooting mode and no
language will be selected. You can perform the initial
setup by turning the camera off and then on again to
display the initial setup dialog and repeating the process
from Step 1.
W
Set
Hrvatski
Dansk
Eesti
Deutsch
Indonesia
Norsk
ýHVN\
English
Suomi
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
Italiano
Latviski
Polski
Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ
Nederlands
Français
0DJ\DU
/LHWXYLǐN
Português(Pt)
• The language can be changed at any time from the d setup menu. g “What to Do
If You Can’t Read the Display” (P. 29)
28
EN
Preparation
1
4
Set the date, time, and date format.
• Use the HI buttons on the arrow pad to highlight
items.
• Use the FG buttons on the arrow pad to change the
highlighted item.
• The clock can be adjusted at any time from the d setup
menu. g [X] (P. 159)
X
2019
YMD Time
Y/M/D
Cancel
The time is displayed using a
24-hour clock.
5
Complete the initial setup.
• Press the Q button to set the clock.
• If the battery is removed from the camera and the camera is left for a while, the date and
time may be reset to the factory default setting.
• You may also need to adjust the frame rate before shooting movies. g [nK]
(P. 149)
29
EN
Preparation
1
What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display
If you see unfamiliar characters or words in other languages, you may not have
selected the language you intended. Follow the steps below to choose another
language.
1
Press the MENU button to view the
menus.
2
1
1
ѯєьѬщҕѥѕѓѥё
іѨѯоѶшѯјѪѠдѱўєчдѼѥўьчѯѠк
ѝѤчѝҕњьѓѥё
Y
F
юѧч
4:3
KK
ѱўєчѓѥё
чѧлѧъ ѤјѯъѯјзѠь
j/Y/i
дјѤэ шѤҟкзҕѥ
MENU button
2
Highlight the d (setup) tab using FG
on the arrow pad and press the Q
button.
Q button
Arrow pad
2
1
W
ѯђѧіҙєѰњіҙ
ѯєьѬшѤҟкзҕѥ
дјѤэшѤҟкзҕѥ
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth дѥішѤҟкзҕѥ
чѬѓѥёэѤьъѩд
XдѥішѤҟкзҕѥ
шѤҟкзҕѥдѥіҙч
s
ѳъѕ
j±0 k±0
0.5 њѧьѥъѨ
’19.12.01 12:30:00
3
Highlight [W] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
2
1
W
ѯђѧіҙєѰњіҙ
ѯєьѬшѤҟкзҕѥ
дјѤэшѤҟкзҕѥ
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth дѥішѤҟкзҕѥ
чѬѓѥёэѤьъѩд
XдѥішѤҟкзҕѥ
шѤҟкзҕѥдѥіҙч
s
ѳъѕ
j±0 k±0
0.5 њѧьѥъѨ
’19.12.01 12:30:00
4
Highlight the desired language using the FGHI
buttons and press the Q button.
W
Back Set
Hrvatski
Dansk
Eesti
Deutsch
Indonesia
Norsk
ýHVN\
English
Suomi
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
Italiano
Latviski
Polski
Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ
Nederlands
Français
0DJ\DU
/LHWXYLǐN
Português(Pt)
30
EN
Shooting
2
2 Shooting
Information displays while shooting
Monitor display during still photography
-
2.0
4:3
AEL
P
C
S-IS AUTO
WB
AUTO
+7-3
+2
ISO-A
200
S-AF
RCFP
FLKBKT
99
0
28mm
T W
1:02:03
1023
L
F
250 F5.6
+
2.0
30p
30p
4K
3
U
TO
B
T
O
F
BKTBKT HDR
28mm
T W
P
1
fghi lez
q
r
s
t
u
v
p
P
CBAzyDxwQEF
J
I
K
L
M
H
G
o
76
O
N
123 45
890a
mnjkbcd
Monitor display during movie mode
C-AF
n
PP
28mm
T W
M-ISM-IS
1
±0
LL
R
R
TC 00:00:00:04 DF
1:02:03
ISO
AUTO
WB
AUTO
off
30p
30p
4K
W
RS T
X
V
U
31
EN
Shooting
2
1 Card write indicator ...................P. 19, 22
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ...................................P. 200 – 207
3 Active Bluetooth® connection
.............................................P. 200 – 207
4 Wireless LAN connection.....P. 200 – 207
5 Pro Capture active ..........................P. 74
6 Super FP fl ash ..............................P. 215
7 RC mode.......................................P. 216
8 Bracketing .....................................P. 132
9 HDR/Backlight HDR................P. 52, 137
0 Handheld starlight ...........................P. 51
a Multi focus shot ...............................P. 53
b Multiple exposure..........................P. 139
c D Keystone compensation .........P. 141
d Fisheye compensation ..................P. 198
e S-OVF* ....................................P. 173
f Digital Tele-converter ....................P. 130
g Time lapse shooting ......................P. 131
h Face priority/Eye priority .................P. 67
i Anti-fl icker shooting ......................P. 185
j Zoom operation direction/Focal length
k Internal temperature warning ........P. 228
l Flash
(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)
m AF confi rmation mark......................P. 35
n Dust reduction...............................P. 223
o Image stabilizer...............................P. 86
p Picture mode...........................P. 98, 129
q White balance .................................P. 83
r Sequential shooting/Self-timer/
Anti-Shock shooting/Silent shooting/
Pro Capture shooting/
High resolution shooting
...........................................P. 71 – 76, 87
s Aspect ratio .....................................P. 87
t Image quality (still images) .....P. 88, 129
u Record mode (movies) ...................P. 89
v Available recording time ...............P. 242
w Number of storable still pictures ...P. 241
x Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 106
y Top: Flash intensity control .............P. 97
Bottom: Exposure compensation ....P. 64
z Level gauge ....................................P. 33
A Exposure compensation value........P. 64
B Aperture value ........................ P. 37 – 43
C Shutter speed ......................... P. 37 – 43
D Histogram .......................................P. 33
E Preview .........................................P. 108
F AE lock....................................P. 70, 175
G Shooting mode........................ P. 34 – 59
H Custom mode .........................P. 57, 128
I Touch operation ......................P. 36, 123
J Flash intensity control .....................P. 97
K ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 70, 80
L AF mode .........................................P. 80
M Metering mode ................................P. 82
N Flash mode ...............................P. 93, 94
O Battery level ....................................P. 26
P Live guide recall ..............................P. 49
Q Flicker scan...................................P. 194
* Shown in viewfi nder only.
R Audio recording level * ....................P. 61
S Recording level meter ...................P. 150
T Movie sound .................................P. 150
U Silent shooting tab ..........................P. 61
V Movie (exposure) mode ................P. 147
W Movie effect ....................................P. 59
X Time code .....................................P. 146
* Displayed only while audio recording level is being adjusted.
32
EN
Shooting
2
Switching between displays
The camera is equipped with an eye sensor, which turns the viewfi nder on when you
put your eye to the viewfi nder. When you take your eye away, the sensor turns the
viewfi nder off and turns the monitor on.
Monitor
Put your
eye to the
viewfi nder
Viewfi nder
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
ISO-A
200
S-AF
1023
250 F5.6 0.0
0
L
F
30p
30p
4K
Live view is displayed on the monitor. The viewfi nder turns on automatically
when you bring it to your eye. When
the viewfi nder is lit up, the monitor
turns off.
• If the viewfi nder is not in focus, put your eye to the
viewfi nder and focus the display by rotating the
diopter adjustment dial.
• Press the u button to switch between live view
and viewfi nder shooting (live view and super control
panel display). If the super control panel (P. 77)
is displayed in the monitor, the viewfi nder will turn
on when you put your eye to the viewfi nder.
• You can display the EVF Auto Switch setting menu
if you press and hold the u button. g [EVF
Auto Switch] (P. 173)
u button
Diopter adjustment dial
33
EN
Shooting
2
Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during
shooting using the INFO button.
INFO button
INFO
INFO
Level Gauge display
(Custom2)
P
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-IS AUTO
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
INFO
INFO
Image Only
Histogram display
(Custom1)
Basic Information
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
INFO
INFO
INFO
• You can change Custom1 and Custom2 settings. g [G/Info Settings] > [LV-Info]
(P. 166), [V Info Settings] (P. 173)
• The information shown in movie (n) mode can differ from that displayed in still
photography mode. g Video Menu > [ n Display Settings] (P. 146)
• The information display screens can be switched in either direction by rotating the dial
while pressing the INFO button.
Histogram display
A histogram showing the distribution of
brightness in the image is displayed. The
horizontal axis gives the brightness, the vertical
axis the number of pixels of each brightness
in the image. Areas above the upper limit at
shooting are displayed in red, those below the
lower limit in blue, and those within the spot
metering range in green.
More
Less
Dark Bright
Level gauge display
The orientation of the camera is indicated. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar
and the “horizon” direction on the horizontal bar.
• The level gauge is intended as a guide only.
• Calibrate the gauge if you fi nd it is no longer truly plumb or level. g [Level Adjust]
(P. 174)
34
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting still pictures
Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode, and then shoot
the image.
Indicator
Mode icon
Types of shooting modes
For how to use the various shooting modes, see the following.
PProgram AE (P. 37)
AAperture-priority AE (P. 39)
SShutter-priority AE (P. 41)
MManual exposure (P. 43)
BBulb/time (P. 45)
Live composite (P. 47)
BAUTO (P. 49)
SCN Scene (P. 50)
ART Art fi lter (P. 55)
CCustom (P. 57)
nMovie (P. 59)
1
Press the mode dial lock to unlock it, and then turn to set the mode you wish
to use.
• When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time
you press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released.
35
EN
Shooting
2
2
Frame the shot.
• Be careful that your fi ngers or the
camera strap do not obstruct the
lens or AF illuminator.
Landscape position Portrait position
3
Adjust the focus.
• Lightly press the shutter button down to the fi rst position (press the shutter button
halfway).
The AF confi rmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green frame (AF target) will
be displayed in the focus location.
Press the shutter
button halfway AF confi rmation mark
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
L
F
P
250 F5.6 0.0
0
1:02:03
28mm
T W
ISO-A
200
S-IS AUTO
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
AF frame AF target
• If the camera is unable to focus, the AF confi rmation mark will fl ash (P. 224).
• The AF frame varies with the option chosen for AF-target mode. The area covered
by the AF target can be chosen in the AF-target selection display (P. 65). The AF
frame is not displayed when q (all targets) is chosen for AF-target mode.
4
Release the shutter.
• Press the shutter button all the way (fully).
• The camera will release the shutter and take a picture.
• The shot image will be displayed on the monitor.
• You can focus and take pictures using touch controls. g “Shooting with touch screen
operations” (P. 36)
Pressing the shutter button halfway and all the way down
The shutter button has two positions. The act of lightly pressing the shutter button to the
fi rst position and holding it there is called “pressing the shutter button halfway”, that of
pressing it all the way down to the second position “pressing the shutter button all (or the
rest of) the way down”.
Press halfway Press the rest of
the way down
36
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting with touch screen operations
Tap d to cycle through touch screen settings.
dTap a subject to focus and automatically release
the shutter. This function is not available in movie
mode.
UTouch screen operations are disabled.
VTap to display an AF target and focus on the
subject in the selected area. You can use the touch
screen to choose the position and size of the focus
frame. Photographs can be taken by pressing the
shutter button.
ISO-A
200
1:02:03
250 F5.6
S-AF
1023
Previewing the subject (V)
1
Tap the subject in the display.
• An AF target will be displayed.
• Use the slider to choose the size of the frame.
• Tap S to turn off the display of the AF target. Off
1414
10
10
7
7
5
5
3x
3x
250 F5.6
S-IS AUTO
S-AF
2
Use the slider to adjust the size of the AF
target, and then tap Y to zoom in at the frame
position.
• Use your fi nger to scroll the display when the
picture is zoomed in.
• Tap Z to cancel the zoom display.
10x
• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
In the one-touch capture white-balance display and when buttons or dials are in use
• Do not touch the display with your fi ngernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.
• You can disable the touch screen operation. g [Touchscreen Settings] (P. 174)
37
EN
Shooting
2
Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter speed
(P: Program AE)
The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject
brightness.
1
Rotate the mode dial to P.
2
Focus and check the display.
• The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera
are displayed.
3
Take pictures.
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Shooting mode
Shutter speed
Aperture
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed and aperture
displays will fl ash as shown.
Display Problem/solution
Large aperture (low f/-number)/
slow shutter speed
60"
60"
F2.8
F2.8
The subject is too dark.
• Use a fl ash.
Small aperture (high f/-number)/
fast shutter speed
F22
F22
8000
8000
Subject is too bright.
• The limits of the camera metering system have been
exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density)
fi lter to reduce the amount of light entering the
camera.
• Take pictures in silent mode. g “Shooting without
shutter sound (Silent s)” (P. 74)
• When using a fi xed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO)” (P. 70, 80)
• The aperture value shown when the displays fl ash varies with the lens and focal length.
38
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting Settings in Mode P
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 64)
Rear dial: Program shift
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g [K Dial
Function] (P. 164)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can
also be assigned other roles. g [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 181)
Program Shift
Without changing exposure, you can choose from different
combinations of aperture and shutter speed selected
automatically by the camera. This is known as program
shift.
• Rotate the rear dial until the camera displays the desired
combination of aperture and shutter speed.
• The shooting mode indicator in the display changes from P
to Ps while program shift is in effect. To end program shift,
rotate the rear dial in the opposite direction until Ps is no
longer displayed.
Ps
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
1023
0.0
0
S-AF
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Program shift
%
• You can choose whether the display refl ects the effects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of
exposure settings are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)
39
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE)
In this mode, you choose the aperture (f/-number) and the camera automatically sets
the shutter speed for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Lower aperture
values (larger apertures) reduce the depth of the area that appears to be in focus
(depth of fi eld), blurring the background. Higher aperture values (smaller apertures)
increase the depth of the area that appears to be in focus in front of and behind the
subject.
Lower aperture values… Higher aperture values…
F5.6F4.0F2.8 F8.0 F11
…reduce depth of fi eld and increase
blur. …increase depth of fi eld.
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.
2
Choose an aperture.
• At default settings, aperture is selected by rotating the
rear dial.
• The shutter speed selected automatically by the camera
will appear in the display.
3
Take pictures. A
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
0.0
0
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Aperture value
40
EN
Shooting
2
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed display will
fl ash as shown.
Display Problem/solution
Slow shutter speed
60"
60"
F5.6
F5.6
Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value.
Fast shutter speed
8000
8000
F5.6
F5.6
Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher value, the limits
of the camera metering system have been exceeded. Use a
third-party ND (Neutral Density) fi lter to reduce the amount of
light entering the camera.
• Take pictures in silent mode. g “Shooting without shutter
sound (Silent s)” (P. 74)
• When using a fi xed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO)” (P. 70, 80)
Adjusting Settings in Mode A
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 64)
Rear dial: Aperture
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g [K Dial
Function] (P. 164)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can
also be assigned other roles. g [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 181)
• You can choose whether the display refl ects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of exposure
settings are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)
• You can stop aperture down to the selected value and preview depth of fi eld.
g [K Button Function] (P. 108)
41
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing shutter speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE)
In this mode, you choose the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets aperture
for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Faster shutter speeds appear
to “freeze” fast-moving subjects. Slower shutter speeds add blur to moving objects,
lending them a sense of motion for a dynamic effect.
Slower shutter speeds… Faster shutter speeds…
125 250 800060301560”
…produce dynamic shots with a sense
of motion. …“freeze” the motion of fast-moving
subjects.
1
Rotate the mode dial to S.
2
Choose a shutter speed.
• At default settings, shutter speed is selected by rotating
the rear dial.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and
60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in
s (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound
(Silent s)” (P. 74)
• The aperture selected automatically by the camera will
appear in the display.
3
Take pictures.
S
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
0.0
0
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Shutter speed
42
EN
Shooting
2
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the aperture display will fl ash as
shown.
Display Problem/solution
Low aperture value
2000
2000
F2.8
F2.8
Underexposure.
• Choose a slower shutter speed.
High aperture value
125
125
F22
F22
Overexposure.
• Choose a faster shutter speed. Shutter speeds as fast as
1/32000 s are available in silent mode.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher speed, the
limits of the camera metering system have been exceeded.
Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) fi lter to reduce the
amount of light entering the camera.
• When using a fi xed [ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO)” (P. 70, 80)
• The aperture value shown when the display fl ashes varies with the lens and focal length.
Adjusting Settings in Mode S
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 64)
Rear dial: Shutter speed
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g [K Dial
Function] (P. 164)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can
also be assigned other roles. g [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 181)
• You can choose whether the display refl ects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of exposure
settings are visible in the display. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display caused
by fl icker from fl uorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be confi gured to reduce
the effects of fl icker during live view or when pictures are taken. g [Flicker Reduction]
(P. 184), [K Flicker Scan] (P. 194)
43
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M: Manual Exposure)
In this mode, you choose the aperture and shutter speed. You can adjust settings
according to your goals, for example by combining fast shutter speeds with small
apertures (high f/-numbers) for increased depth of fi eld.
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
2
Adjust aperture and shutter speed.
• At default settings, aperture is selected with the front
dial and shutter speed with the rear dial.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/8000–60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in
silent mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound
(Silent s)” (P. 74)
• The display shows the difference between the exposure
produced by the selected aperture and shutter speed
and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will fl ash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
• When [AUTO] is selected for [ISO], ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted for optimal exposure at the
selected exposure settings. [ISO] defaults to [AUTO].
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 70, 80)
3
Take pictures.
M
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
0
+
2.0
ISO
400
1023
S-AF
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure with [AUTO] selected for [ISO], the
ISO sensitivity display will fl ash as shown.
Display Problem/solution
ISO-A
ISO-A
LOW
LOW
Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value or faster shutter speed.
ISO-A
ISO-A
6400
6400
Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value or slower shutter speed.
• If the warning does not clear from the display, choose a higher
value for ISO sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)”
(P. 70, 80), [ISO-Auto Set] (P. 169)
44
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting Settings in Mode M
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Aperture
Rear dial: Shutter speed
%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g [K Dial
Function] (P. 164)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can
also be assigned other roles. g [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 181)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display caused
by fl icker from fl uorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be confi gured to reduce
the effects of fl icker during live view or when pictures are taken. g [Flicker Reduction]
(P. 184), [K Flicker Scan] (P. 194)
• You can choose whether the display refl ects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display maintains a
constant brightness for ease of viewing. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)
Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation is available when [AUTO] is selected for [ISO].
Because exposure compensation is performed by adjusting ISO sensitivity, aperture
and shutter speed are not affected. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 70,
80), [ISO-Auto Set] (P. 169)
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted using the F
button. Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
• Exposure compensation is added to the exposure difference
shown in the display.
Exposure
compensation
M
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
0
+
2.0
ISO-A
400
1023
S-AF
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Exposure compensation plus
exposure difference
45
EN
Shooting
2
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)
Select this mode to leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can preview the
photo in live view and end the exposure when the desired results have been achieved.
Use when long exposures are required, for example when photographing night scenes
or fi reworks.
“Bulb” and “Live Bulb” Photography
The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Releasing the button ends the
exposure.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live bulb photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates
the live view display during the exposure.
“Time” and “Live Time” Photography
The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end the
exposure, press the shutter button all the way down a second time.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live time photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates
the live view display during the exposure.
1
Rotate the mode dial to B.
2
Select bulb or time photography.
• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.
3
Press the MENU button.
• You will be prompted to choose the interval at which the
preview is updated. B
1:02:03
BULB
F5.6
ISO
400
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Bulb or time photography
4
Highlight an interval using FG on the arrow pad.
5
Press the
Q
button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.
Live Bulb
ISO LOW ~
ISO 400 ~
ISO 800 ~
ISO 1600
24 times
19 times
14 times
9 times
Off
Display Count
Back Set
6
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• If an option other than [Off] is selected, [LIVE BULB] or [LIVE TIME] will appear in the
display.
46
EN
Shooting
2
7
Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the
front dial.
B
1:02:03
BULB
F5.6
ISO
400
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Aperture
8
Take pictures.
• In bulb and live bulb modes, keep the shutter button pressed. The exposure ends
when the button is released.
• In time and live time modes, press the shutter button all the way down once to start
the exposure and again to end it.
• The exposure ends automatically when the time selected for [Bulb/Time Timer] is
reached. The default is [8 min]. The time can be changed. g [Bulb/Time Timer]
(P. 170)
• [Noise Reduct.] is applied after shooting. The display shows the time remaining until
the process is complete. You can choose the conditions under which noise reduction
is performed (P. 169).
• During live time photography, you can refresh the preview by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Bulb photography is used in place of live bulb photography when multiple exposure,
keystone compensation, or fi sheye correction is in effect.
• Time photography is used in place of live time photography when multiple exposure,
keystone compensation, or fi sheye correction is in effect.
• During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, time lapse shooting, AE bracket shooting,
image stabilizer, fl ash bracketing, multiple exposure*, etc.
* When an option other than [Off] is selected for [Live Bulb] or [Live Time] (P. 170)
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 86) turns off automatically.
• Depending on camera settings, the temperature, and the situation, you may notice noise
or bright spots in the monitor. These may sometimes appear in pictures even when [Noise
Reduct.] (P. 169) is enabled.
%
• Display brightness can be adjusted during bulb/time photography. At default settings, the
display is darker than normal. g [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 170)
• During bulb/time photography, the brightness of the subject in the display is enhanced for
ease of viewing when lighting is poor. g [Live View Boost] (P. 167)
• In mode
B (bulb), you can adjust focus manually while the exposure is in progress. This
allows you to defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure. g [Bulb/
Time Focusing] (P. 180)
47
EN
Shooting
2
$ Noise
While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena
occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device internal
drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup device
that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a high ISO
setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera activates the
noise reduction function. g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 169)
Lighten Blending (B: Live Composite Photography)
Leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can view the light trails left by
fi reworks or stars and photograph them without changing the exposure of the
background. The camera combines multiple shots and records them as a single
photograph.
1
Rotate the mode dial to B.
2
Select [LIVE COMP].
• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.
3
Press the MENU button.
• The [Composite Settings] menu will be displayed. B
1:02:03
LIVECOMP
F5.6
Press shutter button once
to prepare for composite
shooting.
0
0.0
1023
Live composite photography
4
Highlight an exposure time using FG on the arrow
pad.
• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.
5
Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.
Composite Settings
1sec
Exposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.
Back Set
6
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
7
Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the front dial.
8
Press the shutter button all the way down to ready
the camera.
• The camera is ready to shoot when [Ready for
composite shooting] is displayed.
B
1:02:03
LIVECOMP
F5.6
ISO
400
Ready for composite shooting
0.0
0
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
48
EN
Shooting
2
9
Press the shutter button to start shooting.
• Live composite photography will start. The display will be updated after each
exposure.
10
Press the shutter button again to end shooting.
• Live composite photography can continue for up to three hours. The maximum
recording time available varies with battery level and shooting conditions.
• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Limitations apply to some features during shooting, including:
sequential shooting, the self-timer, interval timer photography, AE bracketing, fl ash
bracketing, focus bracketing, High Res Shot, HDR photography, multiple exposure,
keystone compensation, and fi sheye correction.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 86) turns off automatically.
%
• Display brightness can be adjusted during live composite photography. At default settings,
the display is darker than normal. g [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 170)
• The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can be
chosen in advance using the menus. g [Composite Settings] (P. 193)
49
EN
Shooting
2
Letting the camera choose the settings (AUTO mode)
The camera adjusts settings to suit the scene; all you have to do is press the shutter
button.
Use live guides to easily adjust such parameters as color, brightness, and background
blurring.
1
Set the mode dial to B.
• In auto mode, the camera automatically selects
the scene mode option appropriate to your subject
when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the
selection has been made, the B icon in the bottom
left corner of the display will be replaced by the icon
for the chosen scene.
2
To adjust shooting settings, display the live guide
by pressing the Q button.
• Use FG to highlight an item in the live guide and
press Q to display a slider.
Change Color Saturation
Guide item
3
Use FG to position the slider and choose a
level.
• Press the Q button to save changes.
• To exit, press the MENU button.
• When [Shooting Tips] is selected, use FG to
highlight the item and press the Q button to display
the detail.
• The effect of the selected level is visible in the display.
If [Blur Background] or [Express Motions] is selected,
the display will return to normal, but the selected
effect will be visible in the fi nal photograph.
0
Clear & Vivid
Flat & Muted
Slider
4
To set multiple live guides, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
• A check is displayed on the guide item for live guides
that are already set.
• [Blur Background] and [Express Motions] cannot be
set at the same time.
Change Color Saturation
5
Take pictures.
• To clear the live guides from the display, press the MENU button.
• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality, image quality will automatically be set to
RAW+JPEG.
• Live guide settings are not applied to the RAW copy.
• Pictures may appear grainy at some live guide setting levels.
50
EN
Shooting
2
• Changes to live guide setting levels may not be visible in the monitor.
• Frame rates drop the closer the [Express Motions] slider is to [Blurred Motion].
• The fl ash cannot be used when a live guide is set.
• Choosing live guide settings that exceed the limits of the camera exposure meters may
result in pictures that are overexposed or underexposed.
$
• Touch controls can also be used.
Shooting in scene mode (SCN mode)
The camera automatically optimizes settings for the subject or scene.
1
Rotate the mode dial to SCN.
2
Use FGHI to highlight a scene and press the
Q button.
Motion Scenery
Nightscapes
Indoors Close-ups
People
3
Use HI to highlight a scene mode and press the
Q button.
Portrait
4
Take pictures.
• To choose a different scene, press the Q button. Next, press the MENU button to
return to the scene-selection display.
51
EN
Shooting
2
Types of scene modes
Subject type Scene mode Description
People
BPortrait Suitable for portrait shooting.
Brings out skin texture.
ee-Portrait Smooths out skin tones and texture. The camera
records two pictures: one with the effect applied and
one without.
DPortrait +
Landscape
Suitable for portraits featuring a landscape in the
background.
Blues, greens, and skin tones are captured beautifully.
U Portrait +
Nightscape
Suitable for portrait shooting against a background of
night view.
Attach an external fl ash unit designed for use with the
camera (P. 93).
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).
mChildren Suitable for photographs of children and other active
subjects.
Nightscapes
G Nightscape Suitable for tripod shooting of night scenes.
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).
UPortrait +
Nightscape
Suitable for portrait shooting against a background of
night view.
Attach an external fl ash unit designed for use with the
camera (P. 93).
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).
H Handheld
Starlight
Suitable for shooting night scenes without a tripod.
Reduces blur when shooting low light/illuminated
scenes.
The camera makes eight exposures and combines
them into a single photograph.
X Fireworks Suitable for shooting fi reworks at night.
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).
52
EN
Shooting
2
Subject type Scene mode Description
Nightscapes d Light Trails
The camera automatically shoots multiple images,
takes newly bright areas only, and composites them
into a single image.
With normal long exposure, an image of light trace such
as star trails with bright buildings tends to get too bright.
You can capture them without over exposure while
checking the progress.
Press the shutter button to start shooting, then view the
changing result in the monitor and press the shutter
button again to end shooting once the desired result is
achieved (maximum 3 hours).
We recommend that you use a tripod and either
OI.Share or a remote cable (P. 204, 219).
• Advanced settings can be accessed via live
composite photography (dark and light fi eld
composite) in B mode (P. 47).
Motion
CSport Suitable for fast action shooting.
The camera will take photos while the shutter button is
pressed.
mChildren Suitable for photographs of children and other active
subjects.
JPanning Choose to blur the background behind moving objects.
The camera chooses the optimal shutter speed for
panning shots based on camera motion.
Scenery
FLandscape Suitable for landscape shooting.
`Sunset Suitable for shooting the sunset.
g
Beach & Snow
Suitable for shooting at snow-capped mountains,
seascapes in the sun, and other whitish scenes.
s Panorama
Take photos that can afterwards be joined on a
computer to create a panorama.
• For information on taking photos using this feature,
see “Shooting a Panorama” (P. 54).
E Backlight HDR
Suitable for high-contrast scenes. Each time the shutter
button is pressed, the camera takes four shots and
subsequently merges them into one, correctly exposed
image.
53
EN
Shooting
2
Subject type Scene mode Description
Indoors
WCandlelight Suitable for shots of candlelit scenes. Warm colors are
preserved.
k Silent sDisable camera sounds and lights in situations in which
they may be unwelcome (P. 74).
BPortrait Suitable for portrait shooting.
Brings out skin texture.
ee-Portrait Smooths out skin tones and texture.
The camera records two pictures: one with the effect
applied and one without.
mChildren Suitable for photographs of children and other active
subjects.
E Backlight HDR
Suitable for high-contrast scenes. Each time the shutter
button is pressed, the camera takes four shots and
subsequently merges them into one, correctly exposed
image.
Close-ups
iMacro Suitable for close-ups.
jNature Macro Suitable for vivid close-ups of fl owers or insects.
dDocuments Suitable for photos of timetables or other documents.
The camera heightens the contrast between the text
and background.
t Multi Focus
Shot The camera takes eight photos, varying the focus
distance with each shot.
• To maximize the benefi ts of the scene modes, some of the shooting function settings are
disabled.
• Some time may be needed to record pictures taken using [e-Portrait]. In addition, when
the image quality mode is [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
• Movies cannot be recorded using [e-Portrait], [Handheld Starlight], [Panorama], or
[Backlight HDR].
• Movie recording is not available in [Light Trails] mode when (high-speed movie
recording) is selected for [nK].
• [Handheld Starlight] pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality will be recorded
in RAW+JPEG format, with the fi rst frame recorded as a RAW image and the fi nal
composite as a JPEG image.
• [Backlight HDR] records HDR-processed images in JPEG format. When the image quality
mode is set to [RAW], the image is recorded in RAW+JPEG.
• In [Panning], J is displayed during panning detection, and I is displayed when nothing
is detected.
• When using a lens with an image stabilizer switch in [Panning], turn the image stabilizer
switch off.
Suffi cient panning effects may not be obtained in bright conditions. Use a commercially
available ND fi lter to obtain effects more easily.
• Shooting will end if zoom is adjusted while photographs are being taken in [Multi Focus
Shot] mode.
• No pictures can be taken in [Multi Focus Shot] mode when a Four-Thirds lens is attached.
54
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting a Panorama
Pictures taken using this option can be joined together to form a panorama. You will
need to install the latest version of Olympus Workspace on your computer to join
pictures together to form a panorama. g “Connecting the camera to a computer”
(P. 208)
1
Highlight [Panorama] in the SCN mode menu (P. 51) and press the Q
button.
2
Use FGHI to choose a pan direction.
3
Take a picture, using the guides to frame the shot.
• Focus, exposure, and other settings are fi xed at the
values for the fi rst shot.
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
1023
4
Take the remaining images, framing each shot so that the guides overlap with
the previous picture.
[ 2 ] [ 3 ]
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
1023 Exit
Exit
• A panorama may include up to 10 images. A warning indicator (g) is displayed after
the tenth shot.
• During panorama shooting, the image previously taken for position alignment will not
be displayed. With the frames or other markers for display in the images as a guide,
set the composition such that the edges of the overlapping images overlap within the
frames.
5
After taking the last shot, press Q to end the series.
55
EN
Shooting
2
Using art fi lters (ART mode)
1
Rotate the mode dial to ART.
2
Use HI to highlight a fi lter.
3
Press G, highlight an effect using HI, and press
the Q button.
4
Take pictures.
• Press the Q button to choose a different art fi lter. If
effects are displayed, press F.
• The effects available vary with the selected fi lter (Soft
Focus Effect, Pin Hole Effect, Frame Effect, White Edge
Effect, Star Light Effect, Color Filter, Monochrome Color,
Blur Effect, or Shade Effect).
Effect
Off
Pop Art 1
ART
1
ART
1
Types of art fi lters
Pop Art 1/2 * Creates an image that emphasizes the beauty of color.
Soft Focus Creates an image that expresses a soft tone atmosphere.
Pale&Light Color 1/2 * Creates an image that expresses warm light by scattering
overall light and slightly overexposing the image.
Light Tone Creates a high-quality image by softening both shadows
and highlights.
Grainy Film 1/2 * Creates an image that expresses the roughness of black
and white images.
Pin Hole 1/2/3 * Creates an image that looks as if it was taken using an old
or toy camera by dimming the image perimeter.
Diorama 1/2 * Creates a miniature-like image by emphasizing saturation
and contrast, and blurring unfocused areas.
Cross Process 1/2 * Creates an image that expresses a surreal atmosphere.
Cross Process II creates an image that emphasizes
magenta.
Gentle Sepia Creates a high-quality image by drawing out shadows and
softening the overall image.
Dramatic Tone 1/2 * Creates an image that emphasizes the difference between
brightness and darkness by partially increasing contrast.
Key Line 1/2 * Creates an image that emphasizes edges and adds an
illustrative style.
56
EN
Shooting
2
Watercolor 1/2 * Creates a soft, bright image by removing dark areas,
blending pale colors on a white canvas, and further
softening contours.
Vintage 1/2/3 * Expresses an everyday shot in a nostalgic, vintage tone
using printed fi lm discoloration and fading.
Partial Color 1/2/3 * Impressively expresses a subject by extracting colors you
want to emphasize and keeping everything else monotone.
Bleach Bypass 1/2
The “bleach bypass” effect, which you may recognize from
motion pictures and the like, can be used to great effect in
shots of streetscapes or metal objects.
Instant Film A contemporary take on the shadow and skin tones typical
of fi lm.
ART BKT (ART bracketing) Records images using all art fi lter options with a single shot.
Press the INFO button on the selection screen to select a
fi lter to record with.
* 2 and 3 are altered versions of the original (1).
• To maximize the benefi ts of the art fi lters, some of the shooting function settings are
disabled.
• If [RAW] is currently selected for image quality (P. 88, 129), image quality will
automatically be set to RAW+JPEG. The art fi lter will be applied to the JPEG copy only.
• Depending on the subject, tone transitions may be ragged, the effect may be less
noticeable, or the image may become more “grainy”.
• Some effects may not be visible during movie recording.
• Playback may differ according to the fi lters, effects, or movie quality settings applied.
Using [Partial Color]
Record only selected hues in color.
1
Rotate the mode dial to ART.
2
Select [Partial Color 1/2/3] in the art fi lter menu.
3
Highlight an effect and press the Q button.
• A color ring appears in the display.
ColorColor
4
Rotate the front or rear dial to select a color.
• The effect is visible in the display.
5
Take pictures.
• To choose a different color after shooting, rotate the front or rear dial to display the
color ring.
57
EN
Shooting
2
Custom Mode (C mode)
Save settings as a Custom Mode (C mode) for instant recall.
• Custom settings can be saved by selecting [Custom Mode C] for [Reset / Custom
Modes] > [Assign to Custom Mode] (P. 128) in W Shooting Menu 1.
• Custom settings can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to C.
• At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.
58
EN
Shooting
2
Recording Movies
Recording movies in photo shooting modes
The R button can be used for movie recording even when the mode dial is not in the
n position.
1
Press the R button to begin recording.
• Movie you are recording will be displayed on the monitor.
• If you put your eye to the viewfi nder, movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfi nder.
• You can change the focus location by tapping the screen while recording.
R button
2
Press the R button again to end recording.
• The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.
• CMOS image sensors of the type used in the camera generate a so-called “rolling
shutter” effect that can cause distortion in pictures of moving objects. This distortion is
a phenomenon that occurs in pictures of fast-moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting. It is particularly noticeable in pictures taken at long focal lengths.
• If the size of the movie fi le being recorded exceeds 4 GB, the fi le will be split
automatically. (Depending on shooting conditions, movies under 4 GB in size may be split
into multiple fi les.)
• When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
• A UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when:
a movie resolution of [4K] or [C4K] is selected in the [nK] menu or a bit rate of [A-I]
(All-Intra) is selected in the [nK] menu
• If the camera is used for extended periods, the temperature of the image pickup device
will rise and noise and colored fog may appear in images. Turn off the camera for a short
time. Noise and colored fog may also appear in images recorded at high ISO sensitivity
settings. If the temperature rises further, the camera will turn off automatically.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
• The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances:
During multiple exposure (still photography also ends.), while shutter button is pressed
halfway, during bulb/time photography, during sequential shooting, during time lapse
shooting, in B mode, during fi sheye correction
• When (high-speed movie recording) is selected for [nK], movies shot with
[i-Enhance], [e-Portrait], or an art fi lter selected for picture mode will be recorded in
[Natural] mode.
59
EN
Shooting
2
$
• Some settings, such as AF mode, can be set separately for movies and photographs.
g “Using the Video Menu” (P. 144)
Recording movies in movie mode (n)
When the mode dial is rotated to n, movies can be recorded by pressing the shutter
button.
The effects available in P, S, A, and M modes can be applied to movies (P. 147).
You can also use movie effects such as after-images or zooming in on an area of the
image during recording.
• A beep does not sound when the camera focuses in movie mode.
Adding effects to a movie (Movie Effect)
You must fi rst select [Movie Effect] on the screen that can be displayed by selecting the
Video Menu > [n Display Settings] > [n Info Settings] > [Custom1] and pressing I
(P. 146).
1
Rotate the mode dial to n.
2
Tap the on-screen icon of the effect you wish to use.
• Tap the display to add effects during shooting.
• Effects can be added by tapping the display before
starting recording.
W Art Fade Films with the selected picture mode effect. The fade
effect is applied to the transition between scenes.
M Old Film Randomly applies damage and dust-like noise similar to
old movies.
U Multi Echo Applies an after-image effect. After-images will appear
behind moving objects.
T One Shot Echo Applies an after-image for a short time after you tap the
icon. The after-image will disappear automatically after a
while.
X Movie Tele-converter Zooms in on an area of the image without using the lens
zoom. The selected position of the image can be zoomed
in even while the camera is kept fi xed.
3
Press the R button to start recording.
4
Press the R button again to end recording.
• The INFO button also controls the display of shooting information during movie
recording. Note, however, that pressing the INFO button during recording cancels all
movie effects except art fade and movie tele-converter.
60
EN
Shooting
2
Art Fade
Tap the icon. The effect will be applied gradually when you tap the icon of a picture mode.
• Movies shot in partial color use the color selected in ART mode.
Old Film
Tap the icon for the effect to be applied. Tap again to cancel the effect.
Multi Echo
Tap the icon for the effect to be applied. Tap again to cancel the effect.
One Shot Echo
Each tap of the icon adds the effect.
Movie Tele-converter
Tap the icon to zoom in on a selected area of the frame.
1
Tap the icon to display the zoom frame.
• You can change the position of the zoom frame by
tapping the screen or using FGHI.
• Press and hold the Q button to return the zoom frame
to a central position.
2
Tap M to zoom in on the area in the zoom frame.
• Tap N to return to the zoom frame display.
C-AF
n
M-ISM-IS
1
±0
LL
R
R
TC 00:00:00:04 DF
1:02:03
ISO
AUTO
Off
30p
30p
4K
3
Tap O or press the Q button to cancel the zoom frame and exit Movie
Tele-converter mode.
• The 2 effects cannot be applied simultaneously.
• Some effects may not be available depending on the picture mode.
• The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.
• The drive mode displayed in the movie mode is the setting for still image shooting. Still
image shooting is not available in the movie mode.
• Using art fi lter or movie effects may cause the frame rate to drop.
• Art fi lters cannot be used for high-speed recording or slow- or fast-motion movies.
• With the exception of the movie tele-converter, movie effects cannot be used in movie-
only picture modes, for high-speed recording, or for slow- or fast-motion movies.
• Movie Tele-converter is not available when [C4K] or [4K] is set for the image size.
61
EN
Shooting
2
Silencing Camera Sounds While Shooting Movies
You can prevent the camera from recording operating sounds that occur due to camera
operations while shooting.
Tap the silent shooting tab to display the function items. After tapping an item, tap the
displayed arrows to select the settings.
• Electronic zoom*, recording volume, aperture, shutter
speed, exposure compensation, ISO sensitivity
* Only available with power zoom lenses
• The options available vary with the shooting mode.
Silent shooting tab
n
42mm
T W
M-ISM-IS
1
±0
LL
R
R
TC 00:00:00:04 DF
28:56
REC
00:04
REC
00:04
62
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting Settings
The camera offers many photography-related functions. Depending on how often you
use them, you can access settings via buttons, icons in the display, or menus that can
be used for detailed adjustments.
Method Description g
Direct buttons
Adjust settings directly using buttons, including those
listed below. Commonly-used functions are assigned to
buttons for quick access during viewfi nder photography.
• The F, jY, and ISO buttons
63
LV super control panel/
super control panel Choose from a list of settings showing current camera
status. You can also view current camera settings. 77
Live controls Adjust settings while viewing your subject in the display. 187
Menus Adjust settings from menus displayed in the monitor. 125
63
EN
Shooting
2
Direct Buttons
Frequently-used photographic functions are assigned to buttons. These are referred to
as “direct buttons”. Included are the buttons listed below, which can be used for basic
shooting settings.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Direct button Assigned function
1Preview button Preview (P. 108)
2AEL/AFL button AEL/AFL (P. 70)
3ISO button ISO sensitivity (P. 70)
4Arrow pad N (AF-target selection) (P. 65)
5jY button Sequential/self-timer shooting (P. 71)
6u (LV) button Display (monitor/viewfi nder) selection (P. 32)
7F button Exposure compensation (P. 64)
8R button Movie recording (P. 58)
%
• Buttons can be assigned different roles. g [K Button Function] (P. 107)
64
EN
Shooting
2
Controlling exposure (Exposure Compensation)
The exposure selected automatically by the camera can be altered to suit your artistic
intent. Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values to make them
darker. Exposure compensation can be adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, S, ART, and n. To enable
exposure compensation in mode M, select [AUTO] for [ISO] (P. 70).
Negative (–) No compensation (0) Positive (+)
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV. The exposure bar in the
display shows values of up to ±3.0 EV. The bar fl ashes when a value outside this range is
selected.
• The viewfi nder and live view show the effects of values not exceeding ±3.0 EV.
• To preview the effects of exposure compensation in live view, select [Off] for [Live View
Boost] (P. 167) in G Custom Menu Q.
• During movie recording, exposure compensation can be adjusted by ±3.0 EV.
• In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [P], [A], or [S] is selected
for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
• The front and rear dials or touch controls can be used to adjust exposure during movie
recording.
Access via the F (Exposure Compensation) Button
Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial. You can
also hold the F button and use the HI buttons on the
arrow pad.
• To reset exposure compensation, press and hold the Q
button.
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
0
+
2.0
P
ISO-A
200
250 F5.6
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Exposure
compensation Exposure
bar
%
• F (exposure compensation) can be assigned to other controls. Use the [K Button
Function] option (P. 107) in G Custom Menu M to choose the roles played by camera
controls during still photography and the [n Buttons/Dials/Levers] > [n Button Function]
(P. 145) option in the n movie menu to choose roles for movie recording.
Access via the Dials
In modes P, A, and S, exposure compensation can be adjusted using the front dial.
Rotate the dial left or right. In mode M, hold the F button and rotate the front or rear
dial.
65
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)
Choose the size and shape of the AF target. You can also select Face priority AF
(P. 67).
1
Use FGHI to display the AF target.
2
Use the front dial during AF target selection to choose the target’s size and
shape.
qMo
nrs
M Single Target
Select a single focus target.
M
o Small Target
Further reduce the target size for single-target AF-target
selection. Use for pinpoint focus on small subjects.
o
N 5-Target Group
Select a group of 5 targets, arranged in a cross. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within the
selected group.
n
r 9-Target Group (3 × 3)
Select a group of 9 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within the
selected group.
r
66
EN
Shooting
2
s 25-Target Group (5 × 5)
Select a group of 25 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within the
selected group.
s
q All Targets (11 × 11)
The camera chooses the target used for focus from all 121
targets.
q
• The single target mode is automatically applied in movie shooting if the group target mode
is set.
%
• You can adjust AF target settings for [C-AF]. g [K C-AF Center Start] (P. 177) and
[K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 178)
• To enable cluster AF targeting when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb], or [C-AF] is chosen for
[K AF Mode] (P. 80), select [On2] for [AF Area Pointer]
(P. 162). The camera will display AF targets for all areas
that are in focus.
Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point)
The frame showing the location of the focus point is referred to as the “AF target”. You
can position the target over your subject.
1
Use FGHI to display the AF target.
2
Use the arrow pad to position the AF target during
AF target selection.
M
AF target
• The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter]
(P. 130), [Image Aspect] (P. 87), and group target (P. 65) settings.
• Use the [N Custom Settings] (P. 162) in the custom menus to choose the roles of the
dials and FGHI during AF target selection.
67
EN
Shooting
2
Face priority AF/Eye priority AF
The camera automatically detects and focuses on the faces or eyes of portrait
subjects. When digital ESP metering is used, exposure will be weighted according to
the value metered for the face.
1
Use FGHI to display the AF target.
2
Use the rear dial to select an option during AF
target selection.
Selected option
q
IFace Priority On The camera detects and focuses on faces.
NFace Priority Off
Face priority AF off.
KFace & Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the eye
closest to the camera.
LFace & R. Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the right eye.
MFace & L. Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the left eye.
3
Point the camera at your subject.
• If a face is detected, it will be indicated by a white
frame.
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
4
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• The area of the subject used for focus is indicated by
a green border.
• If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, it will focus
on an eye.
• A white border is also displayed if a face is detected
during manual focus. Exposure will be set according
to the value metered for the center of the face.
P
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
28mm
T W
S-AF
0.0
0
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
5
Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to shoot.
• Depending on the subject and the art fi lter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly
detect the face.
• When set to [p] (Digital ESP metering) (P. 82), metering is performed with priority
given to faces.
• Face priority is also available in [MF] (P. 80). Faces detected by the camera are
indicated by white frames.
• If the zoom frame is displayed, the camera will focus on the subject in the zoom frame.
68
EN
Shooting
2
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF (Super Spot AF)
You can zoom in on the display during shooting. For greater precision during focusing,
zoom in on the focus area. At higher zoom ratios, you can focus on areas smaller than
the standard focus target. You can reposition the focus area as desired during zoom.
• To use Super Spot AF, you must fi rst assign [a] to a button with Button Function
(P. 107).
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Shooting display
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
Off
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Zoom frame AF display
10
x
Zoom AF display
aa
a
a (Press and hold) / Q
1
Press the button to which [a] (magnify) is
assigned.
• The zoom frame will be displayed.
• The frame is displayed in the same position as the
target most recently used for autofocus.
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
Off
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
2
Use FGHI to position the zoom frame.
• To re-center the frame, press and hold the Q button.
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
Off
S-AF
0.0
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
L
F
3
Adjust the size of the zoom frame to choose the
zoom ratio.
• Press the INFO button and then use the FG buttons
or the front or rear dial to adjust the size of the zoom
frame.
• Press the Q button to accept and exit.
5
x
69
EN
Shooting
2
4
Press the button to which [a] is assigned once
more.
• The camera will zoom the selected area in to fi ll the
display.
• Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.
• You can also scroll the display using the arrow pad
(FGHI).
10
x
• In shooting mode M (manual) or B (bulb), you can
press the INFO button during zoom to choose aperture
or shutter speed.
• Press the a button to return to the zoom frame.
• Press the Q button to end focus zoom.
• You can also end focus zoom by pressing and holding
the a button.
250 F5.6
Exposure adjustment display
for modes
M
and
B
5
Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.
• Focus zoom applies to the display only. Pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
%
• Touch controls can be used for focus zoom. g “Shooting with touch screen operations”
(P. 36)
• You can make the area in the zoom frame brighter for easier focus or confi gure the
camera to exit focus zoom when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus. g [LV
Close Up Settings] (P. 167)
70
EN
Shooting
2
Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)
Select a value according to subject brightness. Higher values let you photograph
darker scenes but also increase image “noise” (mottling). Select [AUTO] to let the
camera adjust sensitivity according to lighting conditions.
1
Press the ISO button, and rotate the front or rear dial to select a value.
AUTO
Sensitivity is adjusted automatically according to shooting conditions.
Use [ISO-Auto Set] (P. 169) in G Custom Menu T to choose the
maximum sensitivity selected by the camera and the shutter speed at
which auto sensitivity control takes effect.
LOW, 200–25600 Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 offers a good balance
between noise and dynamic range.
Locking the exposure (AE Lock)
You can lock the exposure by pressing the AEL/AFL button. Use this when you want
to adjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images
at the same exposure.
• If you press the AEL/AFL button once, the exposure is locked and u is displayed.
g “Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button (K AEL/AFL)” (P. 175)
• Press the AEL/AFL button once again to release the AE Lock.
• The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or Q button.
71
EN
Shooting
2
Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
Adjust settings for burst or self-timer photography. Choose an option according to your
subject.
1
Press the jY button.
2
Rotate the front or rear dial to select a value.
• Custom self-timer options can be viewed by pressing the INFO button.
oSingle Single-frame advance. The camera takes one photo each time
the shutter button is pressed all the way down.
TSequential High
The camera takes photos at up to about 10 fps while the
shutter button is held all the way down. Focus, exposure, and
white balance are locked at the values for the fi rst shot in
each series. You can choose the frame advance rate and the
maximum number of shots in each series (P. 165). The frame
advance rate drops at [ISO] settings over 8000.
SSequential Low
The camera takes photos at up to about 6 fps while the shutter
button is held all the way down. You can choose the frame
advance rate and the maximum number of shots in each series
(P. 165). Focus and exposure conform to the options selected
for [K AF Mode] (P. 80) and [K AEL/AFL] (P. 175). If
[C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode], the camera
will focus before each shot. The frame advance rate drops at
[ISO] settings over 8000.
XY 12sec
The shutter is released 12 s after the shutter button is pressed
all the way down. The self-timer lamp will light for about 10 s
and then start to fl ash about 2 s before the shutter is released.
The camera focuses when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
ZY 2sec
When the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the
self-timer lamp will start to fl ash and a photo will be taken after
about 2 seconds. The camera focuses when the shutter button
is pressed halfway.
cCustom
Self-Timer Adjust self-timer settings, including the self-timer delay and the
number of shots taken when the timer expires (P. 73).
♦S
(sample
icon) Anti-Shock rReduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion. Available in
single-frame, sequential low, and self-timer modes (P. 73).
♥S
(sample
icon) Silent s
Take pictures with the electronic shutter. Use for shutter
speeds faster than 1/8000 s or in settings where the sound of
the shutter would be unwelcome. Available in single-frame,
sequential low, sequential high, and self-timer modes. In ♥T
mode, focus, exposure, and white balance are locked at the
values for the fi rst shot in each series. The fl ash sync speed is
1/50 s. At [ISO] settings over ISO 8000, the fl ash sync speed
drops to 1/20 s.
72
EN
Shooting
2
pPro Capture
High *
Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The
camera starts recording pictures, including those captured while
the button was pressed halfway, when the button is pressed all
the way down (P. 74). In p mode, focus, exposure, and white
balance are locked at the values metered when the shutter button
is pressed halfway.
qPro Capture
Low *
hHigh Res Shot * Take high-resolution photos (P. 76). Use a tripod.
* Art fi lter picture modes cannot be used.
• To cancel the activated self-timer, press G.
• Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting.
• If you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button when using the self-timer,
the picture may be out of focus.
• In S and q modes, the camera displays the view through the lens during shooting. In
T and p modes, it displays the shot immediately preceding the current frame.
• The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and the
focus of the zoom lens.
• During sequential shooting, if the battery level icon blinks due to low battery, the camera
stops shooting and starts saving the pictures you have taken on the card. The camera
may not save all of the pictures depending on how much battery power remains.
• You can choose the items displayed using [j/Y Settings] in the custom menus
(P. 166).
• Photographs taken in silent and pro-capture modes may be distorted if the subject or
camera moves quickly during shooting.
• To use the fl ash in [Silent s] mode, select [Allow] for [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Silent
s Mode Settings] > [Flash Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2.
73
EN
Shooting
2
Self-Timer Options (c Custom Self-timer)
Adjust self-timer settings, including the shutter release delay and the number of shots
taken when the timer expires.
1
Press the jY button.
2
Highlight c (custom self-timer) by rotating the front
or rear dial and press the INFO button.
3
Highlight items using HI on the arrow pad and
use FG to choose an option. P
Custom Self-timer
Y1s ×3 0.5s Off
Settings o
Number of Frames Choose the number of shots taken when the timer expires.
Y Timer Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down.
Interval Length Choose the interval between the shots taken when the timer expires.
Every Frame AF Choose whether the camera focuses before each shot.
Shooting without the vibration caused by shutter button operations
(Anti-Shock r)
Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion.
Use this option when even slight camera motion can cause blur, for example during
macro or telephoto photography.
You must fi rst enable display of this option by selecting [j/Y Settings] (P. 166) in
G Custom Menu P and placing a check (v) next to the appropriate item.
The delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the start
of shooting can be selected using [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Anti-Shock r] in
X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 142).
1
Press the jY button.
2
Select one of the items marked ♦ using the front or rear dial and press the Q
button.
3
Take pictures.
• When the set time has elapsed, the shutter is released and the picture is taken.
74
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting without shutter sound (Silent s)
In situations where the shutter sound is a problem, you can shoot without making a
sound. An electronic shutter is used to reduce the minuscule camera shake caused by
the motion of the mechanical shutter, much as is the case for anti-shock photography.
The delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the shutter
being released can be selected using [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Silent s] in
X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 142).
1
Press the jY button.
2
Select one of the items marked ♥ using the front or rear dial and press the Q
button.
3
Take pictures.
• When the shutter is released, the monitor screen will go dark for a moment. No
shutter sound will be emitted.
• The desired results may not be achieved under fl ickering light sources such as fl uorescent
or LED lamps or if the subject moves abruptly during shooting.
• The fastest available shutter speed is 1/32000 s.
Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture shooting)
Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway; the moment the button
is pressed the rest of the way down, the camera will start saving the last n captured
pictures to the memory card, where n is a number selected before shooting begins. If
the button is held all the way down, shooting will continue until the selected number
of pictures is recorded. Use this option to capture moments you might otherwise miss
due to your subject’s reactions or shutter lag. Choose from [Pro Capture Low] and [Pro
Capture High].
Shutter button pressed
halfway
Shutter lag
Up to 14 frames Burst shooting
continues
Shutter button pressed all
the way down
Moment you
want
75
EN
Shooting
2
Pro Capture Low (q)
The camera shoots at 10 fps. A maximum of 14 frames can be captured before the
shutter button is pressed all the way down. If [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for
[K AF Mode] (P. 80), the camera will focus before each shot. Choose this option if
you anticipate that the distance to the subject will change during shooting.
Pro Capture High (p)
The camera shoots at up to 30 fps. A maximum of 14 frames can be captured before
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The camera will use [S-AF] when
[C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 80). Choose this option if the
distance to the subject is unlikely to change very much during shooting.
1
Press the jY button.
2
Select p (Pro Capture High) or q (Pro Capture Low) using the front or rear
dial and press the Q button.
3
Take pictures.
• Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. A capture icon ( ) will be displayed. If the
button is kept pressed halfway for over a minute,
capture will end and the Z icon will clear from the
display. Press the shutter button halfway again to
resume shooting.
• Press the shutter button all the way down to start saving
pictures to the memory card.
• Shooting will continue while the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, up to the number of shots
selected for [Frame Count Limiter].
Capture icon
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
L
F
• Selecting q (Pro Capture Low) restricts aperture to values between maximum aperture
and f8.0.
• Four Thirds and third-party Micro Four Thirds lenses cannot be used in q (Pro Capture
Low) mode.
• Flickering occurred by fl uorescent lights or the large movement of the subject, etc. may
cause distortions in images.
• During capture, the monitor will not go dark and the sound of the shutter will not be heard.
• The slowest shutter speed is limited.
• [Max fps] (p/Pro Capture High only), [Pre-shutter Frames], and [Frame Count Limiter]
can be adjusted via the custom menus using the [jL Settings] and [jH Settings] [0]
options (P. 182).
76
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution (High Res Shot)
Shoot at resolutions higher than that of the image sensor. The camera takes a series
of shots while moving the image sensor and combines them to create a single high-
resolution photo. Use this option to capture details that normally would not be visible
even at high zoom ratios. Take steps to steady the camera, for example by mounting it
on a tripod.
Use the [High Res Shot] option (P. 143) in X Shooting Menu 2 to choose time
between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the shutter being
released, as well as the time allocated for the fl ash to charge when a fl ash is used in
High Res Shot mode.
After setting high resolution shooting, you can select the image quality of the high
resolution shooting using image quality mode (P. 88, 129).
1
Press the jY button.
2
Select h using the front or rear dial and press the Q button.
• A h icon will be displayed. The icon will fl ash if the
camera is not steady. The icon stops fl ashing when the
camera is steady and ready to shoot.
• After enabling High Res Shot, check the option selected
for image quality. Image quality can be adjusted in the
LV super control panel.
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
hh
30p
30p
4K
I
F
+RAW
Camera readying for High
Res Shot (fl ashes)
3
Take pictures.
• The h will fl ash to warn that shots may be blurred by camera shake. Keep the
camera steady.
• Shooting is complete when the green h icon clears from the display.
• The camera will automatically create the composite image when shooting is
complete. A message will be displayed during this process.
• Choose from JPEG (IF or JF) and JPEG+RAW modes. When image quality is set to
RAW+JPEG, the camera saves a single RAW image (extension “.ORI”) before combining
it with the high resolution shooting. Pre-combination RAW images can be played back
using the latest version of Olympus Workspace.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 86) is set to [S-IS Off].
• During RC fl ash photography, the maximum fl ash wait time is 4 s and the fl ash control
mode is fi xed at MANUAL.
• High Res Shot is available in modes P, S, A, and M.
• The following cannot be used:
interval-timer photography, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing,
fi sheye correction, and HDR.
• Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art fi lter selected for picture mode will be recorded in
[Natural] mode.
• Image quality may drop under fl ickering light sources such as fl uorescent or LED lamps.
• Defi nition may be lost in areas of the picture where objects moved during shooting.
77
EN
Shooting
2
The Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
The super control/LV super control panel lists shooting settings and their current
values. Use the LV super control panel when framing shots in the monitor (“live view”),
the super control panel when framing shots in the viewfi nder.
• Pressing the u (LV) button during live view enables viewfi nder photography and
displays the LV super control panel in the monitor.
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
L
F
u
(LV button)
1023
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
2019.12.01 12:30:00
S-IS AUTO
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Live view photography Viewfi nder photography (monitor
turns off while viewfi nder is on)
LV Super Control Panel (Live View Photography)
To display the LV super control panel in the monitor, press the Q button during live
view.
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Q
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Recommended ISO
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Super Control Panel (Viewfi nder Photography)
When you frame subjects in the viewfi nder, the super LV control panel will be displayed
in the monitor at all times. Press the Q button to activate the cursor.
1023
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
2019.12.01 12:30:00
S-IS AUTO
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Q
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Recommended ISO
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
78
EN
Shooting
2
Using the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
1
Press the Q button.
• If you press the button during live view, the LV super
control panel will be displayed in the monitor.
• The last setting used will be highlighted.
Cursor
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Recommended ISO
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
2
Highlight an item using FGHI
on the arrow pad or by rotating the
rear dial.
• The selected setting will be
highlighted.
• You can also highlight items by
tapping them in the display.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
KAF Mode
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
3
Rotate the front dial to change the
highlighted setting.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
PreMF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
KAF Mode
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
4
Press the shutter button halfway to accept current settings and exit the LV
super control panel.
• If you are using the super control panel, the cursor will vanish and setting will end.
Additional Options
Pressing the Q button in Step 2 displays options for the highlighted
setting. In some cases, additional options can be viewed by pressing
the INFO button.
INFO button
Q button
1023
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
S-IS AUTO
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
KImage Stabilizer
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Q
P
Auto I.S.
9mm
Focal Length o
S-IS AUTO
S-IS 3S-IS 3
OFFOFF
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
S-IS 1S-IS 1S-IS 2S-IS 2
INFO
P
S-IS AUTO
S-IS 3S-IS 3
OFFOFF
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
S-IS 1S-IS 1S-IS 2S-IS 2
mm0.9000
Auto I.S.
[K Image Stabilizer]
• Touch controls can be used in place of the Q button. Lightly tap the desired setting twice
to display options.
79
EN
Shooting
2
Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
LV super control panel Super control panel
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Recommended ISO
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
1
2
4
5
6
d
c
e
f
g
h
i
ab
3
8097
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Recommended ISO
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
1 Currently selected option
2 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 80
3 K AF mode ...................................P. 80
AF target .........................................P. 65
4 Flash mode .....................................P. 93
5 Flash intensity control .....................P. 97
6 Image stabilizer...............................P. 86
7 Sequential shooting/Self-timer ........P. 87
8 KK .............................................P. 88
9 Metering mode ................................P. 82
0 Face priority ....................................P. 67
a nK..............................................P. 89
b Aspect ratio .....................................P. 87
c White balance .................................P. 83
d White balance compensation/
Color temperature ...........................P. 85
e Picture mode...................................P. 98
f Sharpness N................................P. 101
Contrast u ...................................P. 101
Saturation t ................................P. 101
Gradation z.................................P. 102
Color fi lter x ................................P. 103
Monochrome color y ...................P. 104
Effect 3 ........................................P. 104
Color*1 .............................................P. 56
Color/Vivid*2 ..................................P. 100
Effect*3 ............................................P. 98
g Color space...................................P. 105
h Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 106
i Button function assignment ..........P. 107
*1 Displayed when Partial Color is set.
*2 Displayed when Color Creator is set.
*3 Displayed when an art fi lter is selected.
80
EN
Shooting
2
Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)
You can set the ISO sensitivity.
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 70)
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [ISO].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
ISO
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Recommended ISO
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)
You can select a focusing method (focus mode). You can choose separate focusing
methods for still photography mode and movie mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [AF Mode].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
AF Mode
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
KAF Mode
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
S-AF
(Single AF)
The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. When the focus is locked, a beep sounds, and the AF
confi rmation mark and the AF target mark light up. This mode is
suitable for taking pictures of still subjects or subjects with limited
movement.
C-AF
(Continuous AF)
The camera repeats focusing while the shutter button remains
pressed halfway. When the subject is in focus, the AF
confi rmation mark lights up on the monitor and the beep sounds
when the focus is locked at the fi rst time.
Even if the subject moves or you change the composition of the
picture, the camera continues trying to focus.
MF
(Manual focus)
This function allows you to manually
focus on any position by operating the
focus ring on the lens.
Focus ring
)
Near
S-AFb
(Simultaneous use of
S-AF mode and MF
mode)
After pressing the shutter button halfway to focus in [S-AF]
mode, you can turn the focus ring to fi ne-adjust focus manually.
81
EN
Shooting
2
C-AFK
(AF tracking)
Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the camera then
tracks and maintains focus on the current subject while the
shutter button is held in this position.
• The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer
track the subject. Release the shutter button and then frame
the subject again and press the shutter button halfway.
• Autofocus does not work while the AF target is displayed in red
even if the camera is tracking the subject.
PreMF
(Preset MF) The camera automatically focuses on the preset focus point
when shooting.
• The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke,
or lacks contrast.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, AF will not be available during movie recording.
• AF-mode selection is not available if the lens MF clutch is set to the MF position and
[Operative] is selected for [MF Clutch] (P. 163) in Custom Menu.
Setting a focus position for PreMF
1
Select [Preset MF] for AF mode.
2
Press the Q button and then the INFO button.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• Focus can be adjusted by rotating the focus ring.
4
Press the Q button.
• The PreMF function can be recalled by pressing the button to which [Preset MF] is
assigned in [K Button Function]. Press the button again to return to the original AF.
• The distance for the preset focus point can be set with [Preset MF distance] in Custom
Menu (P. 163).
82
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing how the camera measures brightness (Metering)
You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Metering].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Metering
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Metering
pDigital ESP metering
Meters exposure in 324 areas of the frame and optimizes
exposure for the current scene or portrait subject (if an option
other than [OFF] is selected for [I Face Priority]). This mode
is recommended for general use.
BCenter weighted
averaging metering
Provides the average metering between the
subject and the background lighting, placing
more weight on the subject at the center.
CSpot metering
Meters a small area (about 2% of the frame) with
the camera pointed at the object you wish to
meter. Exposure will be adjusted according to the
brightness at the metered point.
DSpot metering
(highlight) Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects
appear bright.
ESpot metering
(shadow) Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects
appear dark.
• The spot metering position can be set at the selected AF target. g [N Spot Metering]
(P. 170)
83
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting color (WB (white balance))
White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera
appear white. [AUTO] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can be
selected according to the light source when [AUTO] fails to produce the desired results
or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [WB].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• One-touch white balance and custom white balance
options can be viewed by pressing the Q button
followed by the INFO button.
WB
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
WB
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
WB mode Color
temperature Light conditions
Auto white
balance AUTO —
Most normal scenes (scenes containing
objects that are white or close to white)
• This mode is recommended in most
situations.
• You can opt to preserve the colors seen
under incandescent lighting (P. 84).
Preset white
balance
55300 K Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, fi reworks
N7500 K Daylight shots of subjects in the shade
O6000 K Shots taken in daylight under overcast skies
13000 K Subjects under incandescent lighting
>4000 K Subjects under fl uorescent lighting
U— Underwater photography
n5500 K Light sources with the same color
temperature as fl ash lighting
One-touch white
balance P/Q/
W/X
Color temperature
set by one-touch
WB
Situations in which you want to set white
balance for a specifi c subject
• Color temperature is set to a value
metered from a white object under the
lighting what will be used in the fi nal
photograph (P. 84).
Custom white
balance CWB 2000 K – 14000 K Situations in which you can identify the
appropriate color temperature
• Choose a color temperature.
84
EN
Shooting
2
One-touch white balance
Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under the lighting
that will be used in the fi nal photograph. This is useful when shooting a subject under natural
light, as well as under various light sources with different color temperatures.
1
After selecting [P], [Q], [W], or [X] (one-touch white balance 1, 2, 3, or
4), press the Q button followed by the INFO button.
2
Photograph a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper.
• Frame the paper so that it fi lls the display and no shadows fall it.
• The one-touch white balance screen appears.
3
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The new value is saved as a preset white balance option.
• The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning the
power off does not erase the data.
W Keep Warm Color
If desired, auto white balance can be adjusted to preserve the warm colors seen under
incandescent lighting. White balance would normally be adjusted to make white colors
appear white, but this feature can be used to preserve the ambiance created by incandescent
lighting.
1
After selecting [AUTO], press the Q button followed by the INFO button.
• [W Keep Warm Color] options will be displayed.
2
Highlight [On] using FGHI on the arrow pad and press the Q button.
85
EN
Shooting
2
Making fi ne adjustments to white balance (WB Compensation)
Choose white balance compensation values to fi ne-tune auto white balance, preset
white balance, and one-touch white balance.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [WB].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
4
Use FGHI to select the white balance
compensation.
5
Change the white balance compensation value
using the front dial.
• Pressing Q displays hue adjustment options.
White balance compensation
1023
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Auto x
S-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
For compensation on the A axis (Red-Blue)
Move the bar in the + direction to emphasize red tones and in the – direction to
emphasize blue tones.
For compensation on the G axis (Green-Magenta)
Move the bar in the + direction to emphasize green tones and in the – direction to
emphasize magenta tones.
• White balance compensation can be applied to all white balance modes simultaneously.
g [All x] (P. 171)
%
• To preview the effects of changes to white balance, press the R (movie) button. A sample
image captured at the selected white balance will be displayed.
86
EN
Shooting
2
Reducing camera shake (Image Stabilizer)
You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low light
situations or shooting with high magnifi cation.
The image stabilizer starts when you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select the image stabilizer.
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
K Image Stabilizer
1023
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
S-IS AUTO
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
KImage Stabilizer
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
n Image Stabilizer
Still
picture
(S-IS)
S-IS Off Still-I.S. Off Image stabilization disabled. Select this option when
using a tripod.
S-IS
AUTO Auto I.S.
Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.
If panning motion is detected, the camera will
automatically suspend image stabilization on that
axis.
S-IS1All Direction
Shake I.S. Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.
S-IS2Vertical Shake
I.S. Image stabilization applies to vertical motion. Use
when panning the camera horizontally.
S-IS3Horizontal
Shake I.S. Image stabilization applies to horizontal motion. Use
when panning the camera vertically.
Movie
(M-IS)
M-IS Off Movie-I.S. Off Image stabilizer is off.
M-IS1All Direction
Shake I.S. Electronic image stabilization combined with VCM-
controlled image sensor movement.
M-IS2All Direction
Shake I.S. VCM-controlled image sensor movement only.
• Image stabilization may be unable to compensate for excessive camera motion or very
slow shutter speeds. Use a tripod in these cases.
• You may notice noise or vibration while image stabilization is in effect.
• The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that
selected with the camera.
%
• You can choose whether image stabilization will be performed while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. g [Half Way Rls With IS] (P. 165)
• You can prioritize lens image stabilization. g [Lens I.S. Priority] (P. 165)
87
EN
Shooting
2
Using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds System lenses
When using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses, you will need
to specify the lens focal length.
• Set [Image Stabilizer], press the Q button, press the INFO button, then use FGHI to
select a focal length, and press the Q button.
• Choose a focal length between 0.1 mm and 1000.0 mm.
• Choose the value that matches the one printed on the lens.
• The selected value is not reset when you select [Reset / Custom Modes] (P. 127) >
[Reset] (basic) in W Shooting Menu 1.
Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
You can take a series of pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed all the way
down. Alternatively, you can take pictures using the self-timer.
g “Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 71 – 76)
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select the sequential shooting/
self-timer.
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Single
Sequential shooting/
self-timer
Setting the image aspect
Choose the ratio of width to height for pictures according to your intent or your goals
for printing or the like. In addition to the standard aspect (width-to-height) ratio of [4:3],
the camera offers settings of [16:9], [3:2], [1:1], and [3:4].
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Aspect].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Aspect
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Aspect
• Image aspect can only be set for still images.
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected aspect ratio. RAW images are the same size
as the image sensor and are recorded at an aspect ratio of 4:3 with a tag indicating the
aspect ratio selected. A crop indicating the selected aspect ratio is displayed when images
are played back.
88
EN
Shooting
2
Photo File and Image Size Options (KK)
You can set an image quality mode for still images. Select a quality suitable for the
application (such as for processing on PC, use on website etc.).
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [KK].
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
F
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
KK
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
KK
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• Choose from the following options. The image size/compression combinations
available can be selected in the menus. g G Custom Menu X > [K Set]
(P. 196)
Option Image size Compression ratio File format
YSF 5184 × 3888 SuperFine (1/2.7) JPG
YF5184 × 3888 Fine (1/4) JPG
YN5184 × 3888 Normal (1/8) JPG
XN3200 × 2400 Normal (1/8) JPG
RAW 5240 × 3192 Lossless compression ORF
RAW+JPEG RAW plus the JPEG option selected above
• During the high resolution shooting (P. 76), you can select between IF, JF,
IF+RAW, and JF+RAW.
• Selecting High Res Shot changes the image quality option selected; be sure to check
the image quality setting before shooting.
$
• RAW images consist of unprocessed image data to which settings such as exposure
compensation and white balance have yet to be applied. They serve as raw data for
images that will be processed after shooting. RAW image fi les:
- Have the extension “.orf”
- Cannot be viewed on other cameras
- Can be viewed on computers using Olympus Workspace Digital Photo Managing
software
- Can be saved in JPEG format using the [RAW Data Edit] (P. 153) retouch option in
the camera menus
89
EN
Shooting
2
Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nK)
Choose the image quality options available for movie recording. When choosing an
option, consider how the movie will be used: for example, are you planning to process
it on a computer, or is it intended for upload to a website? The camera can store
multiple combinations of frame size, rate, and compression from which you can select
according to your goals. Slow- and fast-motion and high-speed movie options are also
available. g “Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies (Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies)”
(P. 92) and “Filming High-Speed Movies” (P. 91)
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [nK].
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
250 F5.6
nK
S-IS AUTO
n
1:02:03
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
nK
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• To change movie record mode settings, press Q followed by the INFO button and
rotate the rear dial.
90
EN
Shooting
2
The Movie Quality Icon
Changes to settings are refl ected in the [nK] icon as shown below.
Frame size
FHD Full HD *11920 × 1080
HD HD *11280 × 720
4K 4K *13840 × 2160
C4K 4K Digital Cinema *14096 × 2160
Compression/bit rate
A-I All Intra *2• Not available when [4K] or
[C4K] is selected for [Movie
Resolution].
SF Super Fine
FFine
NNormal
Frame rate
60p 60p: 59.94 fps • [60p] and [50p] are not
available when:
- [FHD] is selected for
[Movie Resolution] and
[A-I] is selected for bit
rate
- [4K] or [C4K] is selected
for [Movie Resolution]
• Selecting [C4K] for [Movie
Resolution] fi xes [Frame Rate]
at [24p].
50p 50p: 50.00 fps
30p 30p: 29.97 fps
25p 25p: 25.00 fps
24p 24p: 23.98 fps
24p: 24.00 fps (C4K)
Movie type
nSetting 1, 2, 3, or 4:
Save up to four combinations of frame size, rate, and
compression for later use.
G
Custom:
Choose frame sizes of 4K or 4K Digital Cinema. You can
also shoot fast- or slow-motion movies (P. 92).
—High-speed movie g “Filming High-Speed Movies”
(P. 91)
*1 Movies are saved in MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format. Individual movie fi les can be up to 4 GB
in size. Continuous shots can be no more than 29 minutes in length.
*2 “All-Intra” movies use no inter-frame compression. This suits them to editing but increases
fi le size.
• Depending on the card used, recording may end before the maximum length is reached.
• Bit-rate selection may be unavailable at some settings.
• Movies are recorded at an aspect ratio of 16:9. C4K movies are recorded at an aspect
ratio of 17:9.
91
EN
Shooting
2
Filming High-Speed Movies
Film at high frame rates. Movies are fi lmed at 120 fps and play back at 60 fps.
Stretching playback to double the recording time (as is the case when 60p is selected
as the playback frame rate) lets you view in slow motion movements that in real life
took only the blink of an eye.
A high-speed movie option can be included in the movie image quality menu. Your
choice of playback frame rate determines the playback speed multiplier.
Changes to settings are refl ected in the movie quality icon as shown.
Frame size
FHD Full HD (1920 × 1080)
Movie type
HS High speed (120 fps)
Playback frame rate
60p 60p: 59.94 fps; plays back at 0.5× speed
50p 50p: 50.00 fps; plays back at 0.42× speed
30p 30p: 29.97 fps; plays back at 0.25× speed
25p 25p: 25.00 fps; plays back at 0.21× speed
24p 24p: 23.98 fps; plays back at 0.2× speed
1
Select (high-speed movie recording).
• To use current settings, press the Q button. The camera will exit the menu with the
current options selected.
2
To edit current settings, press the INFO button in Step 1.
• This places the cursor in the list of high-speed movie options.
3
Choose the playback frame rate.
• Use FG on the arrow pad to highlight the desired playback frame rate.
4
Press the Q button to select the highlighted option and exit.
• Focus, exposure, and white balance lock during recording.
• Sound is not recorded.
• The picture angle is slightly reduced.
• Aperture, shutter speed, exposure compensation, and ISO sensitivity cannot be changed
during recording.
• Time codes cannot be recorded or displayed.
• Brightness may change if zoom is adjusted during recording.
• Individual movies can be up to 4 GB in size.
• High-speed movie recording is not available while the camera is connected to an HDMI
device.
• [n Image Stabilizer] > [M-IS1] is not available.
• Movie effects cannot be used.
• [i-Enhance], [e-Portrait], and art fi lter picture modes are not available.
• [Gradation] is fi xed at [Gradation Normal].
• High-speed movie recording is not available during remote photography when the camera
is connected to a smartphone.
92
EN
Shooting
2
Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies
(Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies)
You can create slow motion or fast-motion movies. You can set the recording speed
using nc in record mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [nK].
3
Use the front dial to select
24
C4K (custom record
mode) (P. 90), then press the Q button.
• The option selected for [Slow or Fast Motion] can be
changed by pressing the INFO button. In HI, select
[Slow or Fast Motion] and then press FG to select a
magnifi cation factor and press the Q button. Increase
the multiplication factor to shoot a fast-motion movie.
Reduce the multiplication factor to shoot a slow motion
movie. The frame rate changes accordingly.
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
250 F5.6
nK
S-IS AUTO
n
1:02:03
M-IS
F
24p
24p
C4K
4
Press the R button to start shooting.
• Press the R button again to end shooting.
• The movie will be played back at a fi xed speed so that it appears to be in slow motion
or fast-motion.
• Sound will not be recorded.
• Any picture mode art fi lters will be canceled.
• Either or both of slow motion and fast-motion cannot be set for some options of [nK].
• Shutter speed is limited to values no slower than 1/24 s. The slowest speed available
varies with the option selected for [Frame Rate].
93
EN
Shooting
2
Using a fl ash (Flash photography)
When using a fl ash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose the fl ash
mode using camera controls and take pictures with the fl ash.
Attaching Compatible Flash Units
The methods used to attach and operate external fl ash units vary with the unit. See
the documentation provided with the unit for details. The instructions here apply to the
FL-LM3.
• Confi rm that both the camera and fl ash unit are off. Attaching or removing a fl ash unit
while either the camera or fl ash unit is on could damage the equipment.
1
Remove the hot shoe cover and attach the fl ash.
• Slide the fl ash in until the foot clicks into place at the
back of the shoe.
Hot shoe cover
2
Position the fl ash head for bounce-fl ash
photography or direct lighting.
• The fl ash head can be rotated up and left or right.
• Note that fl ash output may be insuffi cient for correct
exposure when bounce fl ash lighting is used.
3
Rotate the fl ash ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• Rotate the lever to the OFF position when the fl ash is
not in use.
ON/OFF lever
94
EN
Shooting
2
Removing Flash Units
1
Keeping the UNLOCK button pressed, slide the
fl ash unit from the hot shoe.
2
1
UNLOCK button
Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)
When taking pictures with a fl ash unit designed for use with the camera, you can select
a fl ash mode using camera controls. Turning an attached fl ash unit on automatically
limits the fastest available shutter speed.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Flash Mode].
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Flash Mode
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Flash mode
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• Flash settings can be accessed via the LV super control
panel.
Flash mode
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Flash Mode
S-IS AUTO
1023
#
FULL
#
Manual
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Flash output
95
EN
Shooting
2
Flash Modes
#Fill In
Enable the fl ash.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between that selected
for [#Slow Limit] (P. 170) and [#X-Sync.] (P. 170) in
G Custom Menu W.
$Flash Off Disable the fl ash.
• The fl ash will not fi re even if the unit is on.
0Redeye Reduce “red-eye” in portrait photos. In other respects, the fl ash
functions as it does in # (fi ll in) mode.
2Slow
(slow front-
curtain sync)
Slow shutter speeds are used to capture both the main subject
and the background.
• Shutter speed is set according to the exposure value metered
by the camera and is not restricted by the option selected for
[#Slow Limit].
1Red-Eye
Slow 2 (slow sync) combined with red-eye reduction. The fl ash is
timed using front-curtain sync.
MSlow2
(slow rear-
curtain sync)
As for 2 (slow sync).
• The fl ash fi res immediately before the shutter
closes. Moving objects appear to leave trails
of light behind them.
3, 4,
etc. Manual Value The fl ash fi res at the selected level.
• Super FP high-speed sync must be confi gured using fl ash controls.
• In [0] (red-eye reduction) mode, the shutter is released approximately one second after
the fi rst red-eye reduction fl ash. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete.
• [0] (red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired results in some conditions.
96
EN
Shooting
2
Flash Mode and Shutter Speed
The range of shutter speeds available varies with the fl ash mode. The range of
available speeds can be further restricted using the options in the G custom menu.
g [#X-Sync.] (P. 195), [#Slow Limit] (P. 195)
Exposure
mode LV super
control panel Flash mode Flash timing Shutter speed
P/A
#Fill fl ash Front-curtain sync 30 – 1/250 s
0Red-eye
$Flash off — —
1Red-eye slow Front-curtain sync 60 – 1/250 s
2Slow front-curtain sync
MSlow rear-curtain sync Rear-curtain sync
S/M
#Fill fl ash Front-curtain sync 60 – 1/250 s
0Red-eye
$Flash off — —
MSlow rear-curtain sync Rear-curtain sync 60 – 1/250 s
B *
#Fill fl ash Front-curtain sync —
0Red-eye
$Flash off — —
MSlow rear-curtain sync Rear-curtain sync —
* Rear-curtain sync is not available when [LIVE COMP] is selected (P. 47).
• The fastest shutter speed available when the fl ash fi res is 1/250 s. Bright backgrounds in
pictures taken with the fl ash may be overexposed.
• The fl ash sync speed for silent modes (P. 74), High Res Shot (P. 76), and focus
bracketing (P. 134) is 1/50 s. Setting [ISO] to a value over ISO 8000 when using an
option that requires the electronic shutter (for example, silent mode or focus bracketing)
sets the fl ash sync speed to 1/20 s. The fl ash sync speed is also set to 1/20 s during ISO
bracketing (P. 133).
• Even the minimum available fl ash output may be too bright at short range. To prevent
overexposure in pictures taken at short range, select mode A or M and choose a smaller
aperture (higher f-number) or choose a lower setting for [ISO].
97
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting fl ash output (Flash intensity control)
Flash output can be adjusted if you fi nd that your subject is overexposed, or is
underexposed even though the exposure in the rest of the frame is appropriate.
Flash compensation is available in modes other than [#Manual] (manual).
• When [#Manual] is selected, you can adjust fl ash output by pressing G to select
[#FULL] and then rotating the front dial.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [x].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
x
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
x
• Changes to fl ash intensity made with the external fl ash unit are added to those made with
the camera.
98
EN
Shooting
2
Processing options (Picture Mode)
Choose how pictures are processed during shooting to enhance color, tone, and other
properties. Choose from preset picture modes according to your subject or artistic
intent. Contrast, sharpness, and other settings can be adjusted separately for each
mode. You can also add artistic effects using art fi lters. Art fi lters give you the option
of added frame effects and the like. Adjustments to individual parameters are stored
separately for each picture mode and art fi lter.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Picture mode options
Ai-Enhance The camera adjusts colors and contrast for optimal results
according to the type of subject (P. 104).
BVivid Choose for vivid colors.
CNatural Choose for natural colors.
DMuted Choose for pictures that will later be retouched.
EPortrait Enhance skin tones.
JMonochrome Record pictures in monochrome. You can apply color fi lter effects
and choose a tint (P. 104).
KCustom Adjust picture mode parameters to create a custom version of a
selected picture mode.
ve-Portrait Smooth complexions.
FUnderwater Process pictures to preserve the vivid colors seen under water.
• We recommend choosing [Off] for [#+WB] (P. 170) when this
option is selected.
cColor Creator Adjust hue and color to suit your creative intent (
P. 100
).
ePop Art
Uses Art Filter settings. Art effects can also be used.
fSoft Focus
gPale&Light Color
hLight Tone
iGrainy Film
jPin Hole
kDiorama
lCross Process
mGentle Sepia
nDramatic Tone
oKey Line
pWatercolor
qVintage
rPartial Color
vBleach Bypass
9Instant Film
99
EN
Shooting
2
• Art fi lters apply only to the JPEG copy. [RAW+JPEG] is automatically selected for image
quality in place of [RAW].
• Depending on the scene, the effects of some settings may not be visible, while in other
cases tone transitions may be ragged or the image rendered more “grainy”.
%
• You can hide or reveal picture modes using [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 166) in the
custom menus.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Picture Mode
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Picture Mode
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• Depending on the option selected, picture mode
parameters may be displayed in LV super control panel.
Adjust parameters as desired (P. 101 – 104).
1:02:03
sRGB
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Picture Mode
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
Standard
i-Enhance
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Changes depending on
mode selected
100
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting overall color (Color Creator)
The overall color of the image can be adjusted using any combination of 30 hues and
8 saturation levels.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
3
Rotate the front dial to highlight [Color Creator].
• A [c Color/Vivid] item will appear in the LV super control
panel.
4
Highlight [c Color/Vivid] using FG and press the
Q button.
Picture Mode
1:02:03
sRGB
Color Creator
S
-
AF
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Picture Mode
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
1023
c
Color/Vivid
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
c Color/Vivid
5
Adjust saturation and hue.
• Rotate the front dial to adjust hue.
• Rotate the rear dial to adjust saturation.
• To restore default values, press and hold the Q button.
ColorColor
ViVid±0ViVid±0
6
Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.
• Photos are recorded in RAW+JPEG format when [RAW] is selected for image quality
(P. 88, 129).
• Pictures taken using [HDR] (P. 137) or [Multiple Exposure] (P. 139) are recorded at the
[Natural] setting.
• [Color Creator] can be assigned to a camera control. It can be accessed via the button to
which [Multi Function] is assigned (P. 113).
101
EN
Shooting
2
Making fi ne adjustments to sharpness (Sharpness)
Adjust image sharpness. Outlines can be emphasized for a sharp, clear picture.
Settings are stored separately for each picture mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Sharpness].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Sharpness
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Sharpness
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
S
±
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Making fi ne adjustments to contrast (Contrast)
Adjust image contrast. Increasing contrast heightens the difference between bright and
dark areas for a harder, more well-defi ned picture. Settings are stored separately for
each picture mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Contrast].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Contrast
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Contrast
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
S
±
0
±
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Making fi ne adjustments to saturation (Saturation)
Adjust color saturation. Increasing saturation makes pictures more vivid. Settings are
stored separately for each picture mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Saturation].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Saturation
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Saturation
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
S
Normal
±
0
±
0
±
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
102
EN
Shooting
2
Making fi ne adjustments to tone (Gradation)
Adjust color brightness and shading. Bring pictures closer to what you envisage by, for
example, brightening the entire picture. Settings are stored separately for each picture
mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Gradation].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Gradation
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Gradation
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
S
Normal
±
0
±
0
±
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
z Auto
(Shadow Adj)
Divides the image into detailed regions and adjusts the brightness
separately for each region. This is effective for images with areas
of large contrast in which the whites appear too bright or the
blacks appear too dark.
z Normal
(Gradation Normal) Optimal shading. Recommended in most circumstances.
z High
(Gradation High Key) Uses a tone suitable for a bright subject.
z Low
(Gradation Low Key) Uses a tone suitable for a dark subject.
103
EN
Shooting
2
Applying fi lter effects to monochrome pictures (Color Filter)
Color fi lter effects can be added when [Monochrome] is selected for picture mode
(P. 98). Depending on the color of the subject, color fi lter effects can make subjects
brighter or enhance contrast. Orange adds more contrast than yellow, red more
contrast than orange. Green is a good choice for portraits and the like.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
3
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
4
Use FGHI to select [Color Filter]. Color Filter
1:02:03
sRGB
S
-
AF
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
N
Normal
N
S
±
0
±
0
Monochrome
FT
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Color Filter
5
Select an item using the front dial.
N:None No fi lter effect.
Ye:Yellow Reproduces clearly defi ned white cloud with natural blue sky.
Or:Orange Slightly brings out blue skies or the light of the setting sun.
R:Red Further brings out blue skies or autumn foliage.
G:Green Adds warmth to skin tones in portraits. The green fi lter also emphasizes
the reds in lipstick.
104
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting the tone of a monochrome image (Monochrome Color)
Add a tint to black-and-white pictures in the [Monochrome] picture mode (P. 98).
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
3
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
4
Use FGHI to select [Monochrome Color]. Monochrome Color
1:02:03
sRGB
S
-
AF
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Monochrome Color
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
N
F
Normal
N
T
S
±
0
±
0
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Monochrome
5
Use the front dial to select an option.
N:Normal Creates a normal black and white image.
S:Sepia Shoot in sepia-tinted monochrome.
B:Blue Shoot in blue-tinted monochrome.
P:Purple Shoot in purple-tinted monochrome.
G:Green Shoot in green-tinted monochrome.
Adjusting i-Enhance effects (Effect)
Choose the strength of the i-Enhance effect when [i-Enhance] is selected for picture
mode (P. 98).
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Effect].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Effect
1:02:03
sRGB
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
S-IS AUTO
±
0.0
Standard
i-Finish
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Effect
3Low (Effect: Low) Adds a low i-Enhance effect to images.
3Standard
(Effect: Standard) Adds an i-Enhance effect between “low” and “high” to images.
3High (Effect: High) Adds a high i-Enhance effect to images.
105
EN
Shooting
2
Setting the color reproduction format (Color Space)
You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly reproduced when shot
images are regenerated on a monitor or using a printer. This option is equivalent to the
[Color Space] (P. 171) in Custom Menu.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Color Space].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Color Space
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Color Space
sRGB The established color space standard for Windows systems. It is widely
supported across displays, printers, digital cameras, and computer
applications. This setting is recommended in most circumstances.
AdobeRGB
A color space standard defi ned by Adobe Systems Inc. It can reproduce
a wider gamut of colors than sRGB. Accurate color reproduction is
available only with software and devices (displays, printers, and the like)
that support this standard. An underscore (“_”) appears at the beginning
of the fi le name (e.g., “_xxx0000.jpg”).
• [AdobeRGB] is not available in AUTO (B, P. 49), SCN (P. 50), ART (P. 55),
HDR, or movie (n) mode.
106
EN
Shooting
2
Changing the brightness of highlights and shadows
(Highlight&Shadow Control)
Adjust brightness separately for highlights, mid-tones, and shadows. You gain greater
control over exposure than you would with exposure compensation alone. You can
selectively make highlights darker or shadows brighter.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Highlight&Shadow Control
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Highlight&Shadow Control
2
Use FGHI to select [Highlight&Shadow Control], then press the Q
button.
3
Press the INFO button to choose the desired tone
range.
• The tone range changes each time the button is
pressed.
Shadow±0
HighLight
±0
Midtone
Selected tone range
4
Rotate the dials to choose the desired setting.
• [Hi. & Sh.] selected
Adjust highlights using the front dial and shadows using
the rear dial.
• [Midtone] selected
Use the front or rear dial.
• Press and hold the Q button to restore the default
curve.
Midtone
Shadow±0
ResetReset
HighLight+5
5
Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.
107
EN
Shooting
2
Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)
Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing functions.
The functions assigned using [K Button Function] take effect only during still
photography. The functions assigned using [n Button Function] take effect in
n (movie) mode (P. 145).
Customizable Controls
Button Default
K Button
Function ISO
F Button
Function F (Exposure
compensation)
R Function R REC
t Function AEL/AFL
jY Button
Function j/Y (Still picture),
Off (Movie)
u Function u
Button Default
z Function z (Still picture),
a (Movie)
d Function *1*2AF Area Select (Still
picture), Direct Function
(Movie)
D Function *3
# (Still picture),
Electronic Zoom *5
(Movie)
E Function *3j/Y (Still picture),
WB (Movie)
l Function *4AF Stop
*1 The [Direct Function] option for d button applies to each of FGHI.
*2 Assign N to the d button to use it for AF target selection.
*3 To use [D Function] and [E Function] options, you will fi rst have to select [Direct
Function] for [d Function].
*4 The l button can be used for the functions available on some lenses.
*5 Only available with power zoom lenses.
To change the function assigned to a button, follow the steps below.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Button Function], then
press the Q button.
• [K Button Function] of Custom Menu (P. 164)
is displayed in still image shooting mode, and [n
Button Function] of [n Button/Dial/Lever] (P. 145) is
displayed in movie mode.
3
Highlight the desired control using FG on the
arrow pad and press the I button.
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
Button Function
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
Button Function
4
Highlight a function using the FG buttons and press the Q button to assign
it to the selected control.
• The options available vary from button to button.
108
EN
Shooting
2
Available Roles
Role Function
AF Stop Suspend autofocus. Focus locks and autofocus is suspended while
the control is pressed. Applies only to lens l buttons.
AEL/AFL (t)
Lock focus and/or exposure. When used for exposure lock, the
control locks exposure when pressed and releases the lock when
pressed a second time. The behavior of the control can be selected
using [K AEL/AFL] in G Custom Menu J (P. 175).
RREC (movie
recording) The control functions as a movie-record button. Press to start or stop
recording.
Direct Function
(n)
Assign roles to the buttons on the arrow pad (FGHI). The
following roles can be assigned:
H button: N (AF-target selection)
F button: F (exposure compensation)
I button: # (fl ash)
G button: j/Y (drive mode)
• Use [D Function] and [E Function] to assign roles respectively to
the I and G buttons.
Preview (z)
Stop aperture down to the selected value. This lets you preview
depth of fi eld. Aperture stops down to the currently-selected value
while the button is pressed. Preview options can be selected using
[z Settings] in G Custom Menu Q (P. 167).
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
k (one-touch
white balance)
Measure a value for one-touch white balance (P. 84). Frame a
reference object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display,
then press and hold the control and press the shutter button. A list of
one-touch white balance options will be displayed, from which you
can choose the location to which the new value will be saved.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
AF Area Select
(N)
Adjust AF-target settings.
You can choose the AF-target mode (P. 65) and position (P. 66)
and adjust settings for face/eye priority AF (P. 67). Press the
control to view the AF-target selection display. Use the front or rear
dial to choose AF-target mode and face/eye priority AF settings and
the arrow pad to position the AF target.
N Home
(AF home position)
(NH)
Recall previously-saved [AF Mode], [AF Target Mode], and [AF
Target Point] “home position” settings. Press the control to recall
saved settings and press it again to restore the settings previously
in effect. Home position settings are saved using [N Set Home] in
G Custom Menu K (P. 179).
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
109
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
MF (AF/MF toggle)
Switch between AF and MF. Press once to select MF and again to
return to the previous mode. The focus mode can also be selected by
holding the button and rotating a dial. This option has no effect when
[mode2] is selected for [K Fn Lever Function].
RAW K
(RAW quality)
Switch between RAW + JPEG and JPEG [KK] settings. Press the
control to switch from RAW or JPEG to RAW + JPEG or from RAW +
JPEG to JPEG. You can also choose an image quality setting by
holding the button and rotating a dial.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Test Picture
(K TEST)
Take a test shot. You can view the effects of selected settings in an
actual photograph. If you keep the control pressed while pressing the
shutter button, you will be able to view the results but the picture will
not be saved to the memory card.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
I/H
(Underwater wide/
Underwater macro)
Press the button to switch between I and H. Press and hold the
button to return to the original shooting mode. When using a lens with
an electronic zoom, switching between I and H is automatically
set to the wide-angle setting and the telephoto setting.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Exposure F (F)
Adjust exposure settings. Hold the control and rotate the front or
rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. The adjustments available vary with the
shooting mode:
[P]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposure
compensation. Use the FG buttons for program shift.
[A]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposure
compensation. Use the FG buttons for aperture.
[S]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposure
compensation. Use the FG buttons for shutter speed.
[M]: Use the rear dial or FG on the arrow pad for shutter speed.
Use the front dial or the HI buttons for aperture.
[B]: Use rear dial or FG on the arrow pad to switch between bulb/
time and live composite photography. Use the front dial or HI
buttons to choose the aperture.
Digital Tele-
converter (b)Turn the digital teleconverter on or off (P. 130). Press once to zoom
in and again to zoom out.
Keystone Comp.
(D)
Press the control to view keystone compensation settings (P. 141).
After adjusting settings, press the control again to exit. To cancel
keystone compensation, press and hold the control.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
110
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
Fisheye
Compensation
(A)
Enable fi sheye correction (P. 198). Press once to enable fi sheye
correction. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the
front or rear dial to choose from [Angle] options 1, 2, and 3.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Magnify (a)
Press the control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom
in (P. 68). Press the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the
zoom frame, press and hold the control. Use the touch controls or the
arrow pad (FGHI) to position the zoom frame.
HDR
Enable HDR (P. 137). Press once to enable HDR. Press again to
disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust HDR
settings, including HDR bracketing.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
BKT
Enable bracketing (P. 132). Press once to enable bracketing. Press
again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to
adjust [Bracketing] settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
ISO
Adjust [ISO] settings (P. 70). Hold the control and rotate the front
or rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on the
arrow pad to adjust settings.
WB (white balance)
Adjust [WB] settings (P. 83). Hold the control and rotate the front or
rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on the
arrow pad to adjust settings.
Multi Function *
Confi gure the control for use as a multi-function button (P. 113).
Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to choose the
function performed. The selected function can be performed by
pressing the control.
Peaking
Toggle focus peaking on or off (P. 180). Press the control once to
turn peaking on and again to turn it off. When peaking is on, peaking
options (color, amount) can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button.
* The multi-function button can be assigned the following roles:
b (Highlight&Shadow Control), c (Color Creator), J (ISO), I (WB), a (Magnify),
d (Image Aspect), n (S-OVF), 2 (Peaking)
111
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
V Level Disp
Display the digital level gauge. The exposure bar display in the
viewfi nder functions as a level gauge. Press the control again to exit.
This option takes effect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for
[EVF Style] (P. 197) in G Custom Menu a.
u View
Selection
(display selection)
Switch between viewfi nder photography and live view. If [Off] is
selected for [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 173), the display will switch
between the viewfi nder and the monitor. Press and hold the control to
display [EVF Auto Switch] options.
S-OVF (n)Enable [S-OVF] (P. 173). Press once to turn OVF simulation on.
Press again to turn it off.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
AF Limiter
Enable the AF limiter (P. 163). Press once to enable [AF Limiter].
Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear
dial to choose from three stored settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Preset MF (PreMF)
Toggle [K AF Mode] > [Preset MF] on or off (P. 80). Press the
control once to enable preset MF and again to restore the previous
focus mode. Alternatively, you can choose the [K AF Mode] by
holding the control and rotating a dial. Focus-mode selection using
custom controls is not available when [mode2] is chosen for [K Fn
Lever Function] (P. 164).
Lens Info Settings
(sLens)Recall previously-saved lens data (P. 196). Recall saved data for the
current lens after changing lenses or the like.
IS Mode Toggle [Image Stabilizer] on or off (P. 86). Press once to select
[Off] and again to turn image stabilization on. Hold the control and
rotate the front or rear dial to access [Image Stabilizer] options.
Flicker Scan
(P)
Adjust settings for [Flicker Scan] (P. 148, 194). Press the control
to select [On]. You can adjust shutter speed for best results while
viewing banding in the display. Press the control again to display
shooting information and access other settings. Press and hold the
control to select [Off] for [Flicker Scann].
Flash Mode (#)
Adjust fl ash settings (P. 95). Press once to display fl ash options
and again select the highlighted option and exit. Highlight settings
using the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must fi rst set [d Function] to [Direct Function].
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
112
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)
Choose a drive (sequential shooting/self-timer) mode (P. 71).
Press the button to display drive mode options and then choose a
mode using the front or rear dial or the HI buttons on the arrow
pad.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
G Lock (touch
control lock)
Lock touch controls. Press and hold the button once to lock touch
controls and again to unlock.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must fi rst set [d Function] to [Direct Function].
Electronic Zoom
Zoom power zoom lenses in or out. After pressing the control, use the
arrow pad to zoom in or out. Use For I on the arrow pad to zoom
in and G or H to zoom out.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must fi rst set [d Function] to [Direct Function].
Movie H (H)
Zoom in or out using the movie teleconverter (P. 59). Press the
control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom in. Press
the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the zoom frame, press
and hold the control. Use touch controls or the arrow pad (FGHI)
to position the zoom frame.
• This role is available for [n Button Function] only.
S-AF Focus using [S-AF]. Press the control to focus. Focus will lock while
the control is pressed.
• This role is available for [n Button Function] only.
Off The control is not used.
113
EN
Shooting
2
Using multi function options (Multi Function)
Assign multiple roles to a single button.
• To use the multi function feature, you must fi rst assign [Multi Function] to a camera control
(P. 107).
Choosing a function
1
Hold the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned
and rotate the front or rear dial.
• Rotate the dial until the desired feature is highlighted.
Release the button to select the highlighted feature.
P
Highlight&Shadow Control
ISO WB
2
Press the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned.
3
Adjust settings.
Highlight&Shadow
Control
Adjust brightness using the front or rear dial. Press the INFO
button to choose the tone range (highlights, shadows, or mid-
tones).
Color Creator Use the front dial to adjust hue and the rear dial to adjust
saturation.
ISO Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.
WB
Magnify The zoom frame will be displayed.
Image Aspect Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.
S-OVF Press the button to turn the feature on or off.
Peaking
• You can choose the options displayed. g [Multi Function Settings] (P. 166)
114
EN
Playback
3
3
Information display during playback
Playback image information
Simplifi ed display
4:3
2019.12.01 12:30:00
L
F
100-0015
15
×10
48kHz
HDR1
e
9
0
14678
ab
dc
235
Overall display
ISO 400
250
+2.0
sRGB
2019.12.01
12:30:00
WB
AUTO
A+4
F5.6
45mm
+1.0-18
G+4
Natural
1/8
P
5184×3888
4:3
L
F
100-0015
15
×10
48kHz
gfh
n
k
l
m
o
q
p
rstvwu
ji
Playback
115
EN
Playback
3
1 Battery level ....................................P. 26
2 Wireless LAN connection......P. 200–207
3 Including GPS information ............P. 205
4 Print order
Number of prints ...........................P. 120
5 Sound record ................................P. 122
6 Share order ...................................P. 119
7 Protect ..........................................P. 118
8 Image selected .............................P. 119
9 File number ...................................P. 172
0 Frame number
a Image quality ..........................P. 88, 129
b Aspect ratio .....................................P. 87
c Focus stacking ..............................P. 134
d HDR image ...................................P. 137
e Date and time .................................P. 27
f Aspect border .................................P. 87
g AF area pointer ...............................P. 65
h Shooting mode......................... P. 34–59
i Shutter speed .......................... P. 37–43
j Exposure compensation .................P. 64
k Aperture value ......................... P. 37–43
l Focal length
m Flash intensity control .....................P. 97
n White balance compensation..........P. 85
o Color space...................................P. 105
p Picture mode...........................P. 98, 129
q Compression rate .........................P. 196
r Pixel count ....................................P. 196
s ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 70, 80
t White balance .................................P. 83
u Focus adjustment .........................P. 163
v Metering mode ................................P. 82
w Histogram
Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed during playback by pressing
the INFO button.
INFO button
ISO 400
250
+2.0
sRGB
2019.12.01
12:30:00
WB
AUTO
A+4
F5.6
45mm
+1.0-18
G+4
Natural
1/8
P
5184×3888
4:3
L
F
100-0015
15
×10
48kHz
4:3
2019.12.01 12:30:00
L
F
100-0015
15
×10
48kHz
Overall displayImage only
Simplifi ed display
INFO
INFOINFO
• You can add histogram, highlight & shadow, and Light Box to the information displayed
during playback. g [q Info] (P. 188)
116
EN
Playback
3
Viewing photographs and movies
1
Press the q button.
• Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.
• Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial (r) or arrow pad.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
Front dial
Arrow pad
Displays
the previous frame Displays
the next frame
q button
2019.12.01 12:30:00
L
F
100-0020
20
Still image
2019.12.01 12:30:00
PWB
AUTO
100-0004
4
30p
30p
4K
48kHz
Movie
Rear dial (o)Zoom in (p)/Index (q)
Front dial (r)Previous (t)/Next (s)
Operation also available during close-up playback.
Arrow pad (FGHI)
Single-frame playback: Next (I)/previous (H)/playback volume
(FG)
Close-up playback: Changing the close-up position
You can display the next frame (I) or the previous frame (H)
during close-up playback by pressing the INFO button.
Press the INFO button again to display a zoom frame and use
FGHI to change its position.
Index/calendar playback: Highlight image
INFO button
View image info
H (R) button Select picture (P. 119)
0 (AEL/AFL)
button Protect picture (P. 118)
button Delete picture (P. 119)
Q button
View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit to single-
frame playback)
117
EN
Playback
3
Finding Pictures Quickly (Index and Calendar Playback)
• In single-frame playback, rotate the rear dial to G for index playback. Rotate further for
calendar playback.
• Turn the rear dial to a to return to single-frame playback.
Q
Single-frame
playback
2019.12.01 12:30:00
L
F
100-0020
20
Index display
202019.12.01 12:30:00
Calendar display
7
141312111098
21201918
171615
28272625242322
21313029
31302928272625
61 2 3 4 5
2019.12
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri SatSun
q
p
q
p
• You can change the number of frames for index display. g [G Settings] (P. 189)
Zooming In (Playback Zoom)
In single-frame playback, turn the rear dial to a to zoom in. Turn to G to return to
single-frame playback.
2× zoom
Close-up playback
Single-frame
playback 14× zoom
2x
q
p
q
p
2019.12.01 12:30:00
L
F
100-0020
20
14x
Rotating Pictures (Rotate)
Choose whether to rotate photographs.
1
Play the photograph back and press the Q button.
2
Select [Rotate] and press the Q button.
3
Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; the
image rotates each time the button is pressed.
• Press the Q button to save settings and exit.
• The rotated image is saved in its current orientation.
• Movies and protected images cannot be rotated.
%
• The camera can be confi gured to automatically rotate portrait-orientation pictures during
playback. g q playback menu > [R] (P. 153)
[Rotate] is not available when [Off] is selected for [R].
118
EN
Playback
3
Watching movies
Select a movie and press the Q button to display the
playback menu. Select [Play Movie] and press the Q
button to begin playback. Fast-forward and rewind using
H/I. Press the Q button again to pause playback. While
playback is paused, use F to view the fi rst frame and G
to view the last frame. Use HI or the front dial (r) to
view previous or next frame. Press the MENU button to
end playback.
Movie
Share Order
Movie Edit
Play Movie
0
Erase
Back Set
Viewing Movies over 4 GB in Size
Long movies may exceed 4 GB in size. Movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple
fi les. The fi les can be played back as a single movie.
1
Press the q button.
• The most recent picture will be displayed.
2
Display a long movie you want to view and press the Q button.
• The following options will be displayed.
[Play from Beginning]: Plays back a split movie all the way through
[Play Movie]: Plays back fi les separately
[Delete entire n]: Deletes all parts of a split movie
[Erase]: Deletes fi les separately
• We recommend using the latest version of Olympus Workspace to play back movies on a
computer (P. 209). Before launching the software for the fi rst time, connect the camera to
the computer.
Protecting Pictures (0)
Protect images from accidental deletion. Display the
image you want to protect and press the 0 (AEL/AFL)
button to add 0 to the image (protection icon). Press the
0 (AEL/AFL) button again to cancel protection. You
can also protect multiple selected images. g “Selecting
Multiple Pictures (0, Erase Selected, Share Order
Selected)” (P. 119)
• Formatting the card erases all data including protected
images.
0 (protect) icon
2019.12.01 12:30:00
L
F
100-0020
20
119
EN
Playback
3
Deleting Pictures (Erase)
Display an image you want to delete and
press the button. Select [Yes] and press
the Q button.
You can erase images without the
confi rmation step by changing the button
settings. g [Quick Erase] (P. 173)
Erase
Yes
No
Back Set
button
Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)
You can select images you want to transfer to a smartphone in advance. When playing
back images you want to transfer, press the Q button to display the playback menu.
After selecting [Share Order] and pressing the Q button, press F or G to set a share
order on an image and display h. To cancel a share order, press F or G.
You can select images you want to transfer in advance and set a share order all at
once. g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (0, Erase Selected, Share Order Selected)”
(P. 119), “Transferring images to a smartphone” (P. 203)
• You can set a share order on 200 frames.
• Share orders cannot include RAW images.
$
Pictures can also be marked for sharing using the H (R)
button. If the H (R) button is currently assigned a role other
than [h], assign it the [h] role using the [qR Function] option
in the custom menus (P. 164).
212019.12.01 12:30:00
Selecting Multiple Pictures
(0, Erase Selected, Share Order Selected)
You can select multiple images for [0], [Erase Selected] or [Share Order Selected].
Press the H (R) button to select an image; a v icon will
appear on the image. Press the H (R) button again to
cancel the selection.
Press the Q button to display the menu, and then select
from [0], [Erase Selected] or [Share Order Selected].
This function is also available in single-frame playback.
212019.12.01 12:30:00
120
EN
Playback
3
Print order (DPOF)
You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed
and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a
print shop that supports DPOF. A memory card is required when creating a print order.
Creating a print order
1
Press the Q button during playback and select [<] (Print Order).
2
Select [<] or [<ALL] and press the Q button.
Individual picture
Press HI to select the frame that you want to set as print
reservation, then press FG to set the number of prints.
• To set print reservation for several pictures, repeat this
step. Press the Q button when all the desired pictures
have been selected.
All pictures
Select [<ALL] and press the Q button.
Print Order
<
Back Set
ALL
3
Select the date and time format and press the Q
button.
No The pictures are printed without the date and
time.
Date The pictures are printed with the shooting date.
Time The pictures are printed with the shooting time.
• When printing images, the setting cannot be changed
between the images.
X
Date
No
Time
Back Set
4
Select [Set] and press the Q button.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.
• The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a
new print order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices.
• Print orders cannot include RAW images or movies.
121
EN
Playback
3
Removing all or selected pictures from the print order
You can reset all print reservation data or just the data for selected pictures.
1
Press the Q button during playback and select [<] (Print Order).
2
Select [<] and press the Q button.
• To remove all pictures from the print order, select [Reset] and press the Q button. To
exit without removing all pictures, select [Keep] and press the Q button.
3
Press HI to select images you wish to remove from the print order.
• Use G to set the number of prints to 0. Press the Q button once you have removed
all the desired pictures from the print order.
4
Select the date and time format and press the Q button.
• This setting is applied to all frames with print reservation data.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.
5
Select [Set] and press the Q button.
122
EN
Playback
3
Adding Audio to Pictures (R)
You can record audio using the built-in stereo microphone or an optional external
microphone and add it to pictures. The recorded audio provides a simple replacement
for written notes about the pictures.
• Audio recordings can be up to 30 s long.
1
Display the image to which you want to add audio and press the Q button.
• Audio recording is not available with protected images.
• Audio can also be added to pictures using the [Edit] option in the playback menu. Use
[Edit] > [Sel. Image] to select the picture, then press the Q button and select [R].
2
Select [R] and press the Q button.
• To exit without adding audio, select [No].
JPEG
0
Share Order
JPEG Edit
Rotate
<
Back Set
R
3
Select [R Start] and press the Q button to begin
recording.
4
Press the Q button to end recording.
• Pictures with audio are indicated by H icons and
indicators showing the recording rate.
• To delete recorded audio, select [Erase] in Step 3.
R
R Start
No
Erase
Back Set
%
• Audio is recorded at the rate selected for movies. The rate can be selected using
[Movie R] (P. 146, 150) in the n video menu.
Audio Playback
Playback begins automatically when a picture with audio is displayed. To adjust the
volume:
1
Press the q button to display a picture.
2
Press F or G on the arrow pad.
• F button: Raise volume.
• G button: Lower volume.
123
EN
Playback
3
Playback Using Touch Controls
Pictures can be viewed using touch controls.
Full-frame playback
Displaying the previous or next image
• Slide your fi nger to the left to view the next image, and
right to view the previous image.
Magnify
• Lightly tap the screen to display the slider and P.
• Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out.
• Slide your fi nger to scroll the display when the picture is
zoomed in.
• Tap P to display index playback.
Tap Q for calendar playback.
Index/Calendar playback
Displaying the previous or next page
• Slide your fi nger up to view the next page, and down to
view the previous page.
• Tap Q or R to switch the number of images
displayed. g [G Settings] (P. 166)
• Tap R several times to return to single-frame playback.
212019.12.01 12:30:00
S
Viewing images
• Tap an image to view it full frame.
124
EN
Playback
3
Selecting and protecting images
In single-frame playback, lightly tap the screen to display the touch menu. You can
then perform the desired operation by tapping the icons in the touch menu.
HSelect an image. You can select multiple images and delete them collectively.
hImages you want to share with a smartphone can be set. g “Selecting
Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 119)
0Protects an image.
• Do not tap the display with your fi ngernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.
125
EN
Menu functions (Basic operations)
4
4
Basic menu operations
The menus contain shooting and playback options that are not displayed by the LV
super control panel, etc., and let you customize the camera settings for easier use.
Tab Tab name Description
WShooting Menu 1 Photography-related items. Ready the camera for shooting or
access basic photo settings.
XShooting Menu 2 Photography-related items. Adjust advanced photo settings.
nVideo Menu Items related to movie recording. Adjust basic and custom
settings.
qPlayback Menu Playback- and retouch-related items.
GCustom Menu Items for customizing the camera.
dSetup Menu Items for setting the clock, choosing a language, and the like.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
1
1
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes
Image Aspect
Y
F
Off
4:3
KK
Picture Mode
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i
Preliminary and basic
shooting options.
Press the Q button to
confi rm the setting
Guide
Operation guide
Press the MENU button
to go back one screen
Tab
• A guide is displayed about 2 seconds after you select an option. Press the INFO
button to view or hide guides.
2
Use FG to select a tab and press the Q button.
• The menu group tab appears when the G Custom
Menu is selected. Use FG to select the menu group
and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
A1
A1. AF/MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
mode2
S1/C2/M1
S-AF
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KC-AF Center Priority
KC-AF Center Start
±0
Back Set
Menu group
Menu functions
126
EN
Menu functions (Basic operations)
4
3
Select an item using FG and press the Q button to display options for the
selected item.
2
1
2
Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing
Keystone Comp. Off
Off
Off
Off
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
Off
Back Set
2
1
2
Back Set
Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing
Keystone Comp. Off
Off
Off
Off
Multiple Exposure
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
Off
HDR
Off
On
The current setting
is displayed
Function
Q
4
Use FG to highlight an option and press the Q button to select.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.
• For the default settings of each option, refer to “Default Settings” (P. 229).
• Depending on camera status and settings, some items may be unavailable. Items that are
not available are grayed out and cannot be selected.
• You can also navigate the menus using the front and rear dials in place of the arrow pad.
127
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting Menu 2
2
1
1
Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes
Image Aspect
Y
F
Off
4:3
KK
Picture Mode
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1 Shooting Menu 2
WReset / Custom Modes (P. 127)
Picture Mode (P. 98, 129)
KK (P. 88, 129)
Image Aspect (P. 87)
Digital Tele-converter (P. 130)
j/Y/i (drive/time-lapse shooting)
(P. 71, 73, 131)
XBracketing (P. 132)
HDR (P. 137)
Multiple Exposure (P. 139)
Keystone Comp. (P. 141)
Anti-Shock r/Silent s (P. 142)
High Res Shot (P. 143)
#RC Mode (P. 143, 216)
Restoring Default Settings (Reset)
Camera settings can be easily restored to default settings. You can opt to reset almost
all settings or only those directly related to photography.
1
Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.
2
Select [Reset] and press the I button. Reset / Custom Modes
Reset Basic
Recall from Custom Mode
Assign to Custom Mode
Back Set
3
Highlight [Full] or [Basic], and press the Q button.
• To reset all settings except the time, date, and a few others, highlight [Full] and press
the Q button. g “Default Settings” (P. 229)
4
Press the Q button in the [Reset / Custom Modes] menu.
5
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
128
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode)
Editing custom settings
Current camera settings can be saved to any of three Custom Modes. Saved settings can be
recalled by rotating the mode dial to C or using [Recall from Custom Mode].
• [Custom Mode C2] and [Custom Mode C3] can be recalled using [Recall from Custom
Mode].
1
Adjust settings in order to save.
• Set the mode dial to the positions other than AUTO (B), ART, or movie (n) mode.
2
Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.
3
Select [Assign to Custom Mode] and press I.
4
Highlight the desired destination ([Custom Mode C], [Custom Mode C2], or
[Custom Mode C3]) and press the Q button.
5
Select [Set] and press the Q button.
• Any existing settings will be overwritten.
• To restore default settings for the selected custom mode, highlight [Reset] and press
the Q button.
Recalling Saved Settings
In modes P, A, S, M, B, and C, you can recall saved settings but not the shooting mode.
The shooting mode remains that currently selected with the mode dial.
1
Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.
2
Select [Recall from Custom Mode] and press I.
3
Highlight [Custom Mode C], [Custom Mode C2], or [Custom Mode C3] and
press I.
4
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• Settings saved to [Custom Mode C] can be recalled by rotating the mode dial to C.
129
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Processing options (Picture Mode)
You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters in
[Picture Mode] (P. 98) settings. Changes to parameters are stored for each picture
mode separately.
1
Select [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1 and
press the Q button.
• The camera will display the picture mode available in the
current shooting mode.
2
1
1
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes
Image Aspect
Y
F
Off
4:3
KK
Picture Mode
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i
2
Select an option with FG and press the Q button.
• Press I to set the detailed options for the selected picture mode. Detailed options are not
available for some picture modes.
• Changes to contrast have no effect at settings other than [Normal].
%
• You can reduce the number of picture mode options displayed in the menu.
g [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 166)
Photo File and Image Size Options (KK)
g “Photo File and Image Size Options (KK)” (P. 88)
• You can change the JPEG image size and compression ratio combination, and [X] and
[W] pixel counts. [K Set], [Pixel Count] g “Combinations of JPEG image sizes and
compression rates (K Set)” (P. 196)
130
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter)
This option takes a crop at the center of the frame the same dimensions as the size
option currently selected for image quality and zooms it in to fi ll the display. The zoom
ratio increases by about 2×. This allows you to zoom in past the lens’ maximum focal
length, making it a good choice when you are unable to switch lenses or fi nd it diffi cult
to get any closer to your subject.
1
Select [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting Menu 1, and press the Q
button.
2
Highlight [On], and press the Q button.
3
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• When [On] is selected, the zoom ratio increases by 2×
and a
H
icon is displayed. Pictures will be recorded at
the new zoom ratio.
Digital teleconverter
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
L
F
• The digital teleconverter cannot be used with multiple exposure, keystone compensation,
fi sheye correction, or the SCN mode panorama option.
• This function is not available when the information of [Movie Effect] is displayed on the
screen in movie mode.
• This function is not available when [Movie 6] is assigned to a button with [n Button
Function].
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected zoom ratio. In the case of RAW images, a
frame shows the zoom crop. A frame showing the zoom crop is displayed on the image
during playback.
• During zoom, the size of the AF targets increases and their number decreases.
131
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Shooting automatically with a fi xed interval (Time lapse shooting)
You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames
can also be recorded as into a single movie. This setting is only available in P/A/S/M
modes.
1
Select [j/Y/i] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press
the Q button.
2
1
1
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes
Image Aspect
Y
F
Off
4:3
KK
Picture Mode
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/i
2
Select [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse] and press I.
3
Select [On] and press I.
4
Adjust the following settings and press the Q button.
Number of Frames Sets the number of frames to be shot.
Start Waiting Time Choose how long the camera waits before starting interval timer
photography and taking the fi rst shot.
Interval Length Choose how long the camera waits between shots once shooting
has begun.
Time Lapse Movie
Choose whether to record a time-lapse movie.
[Off]: The camera saves the individual shots but does not use them
to create a time-lapse movie.
[On]: The camera records the individual shots and also uses them to
create a time-lapse movie.
Movie Settings Choose the frame size ([Movie Resolution]) and frame rate ([Frame
Rate]) for movies created using [Time Lapse Movie].
5
Press the Q button repeatedly to return to W Shooting Menu 1.
• Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A 99 icon will appear in the shooting display (the icon
shows the selected number of shots). Interval-timer photography
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
99
L
F
6
Take pictures.
• Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fi x the focus
position, shoot in MF.
• [Rec View] (P. 159) operates for 0.5 seconds.
132
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
• If either of the time before shooting, or shooting interval is set to 1 minute 31 seconds
or longer, the monitor and camera power will turn off after 1 minute. 10 seconds before
shooting, the power will automatically turn on again. When the monitor is off, press the
shutter button to turn it on again.
• If the AF mode (P. 80) is set to [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR], it is automatically changed to
[S-AF].
• Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting.
• This function cannot be used with HDR photography.
• Time-lapse shooting cannot be combined with bracketing or multiple exposure.
• The fl ash will not work if the fl ash charging time is longer than the interval between shots.
• If the camera automatically turns off in interval between shots, it will turn on in time for the
next shot.
• If any of still pictures are not recorded correctly, the time lapse movie will not be
generated.
• If there is insuffi cient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded.
• Time lapse shooting will be canceled if any of the following is operated:
Mode dial, MENU button, q button, lens release button, or connecting the USB cable.
• If you turn off the camera, time lapse shooting will be canceled.
• If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through.
Make sure the battery is charged enough before shooting.
• Time-lapse movies created at a size of [4K] may not display on some computer systems.
More information is available on the OLYMPUS website.
Varying settings over a series of photographs (Bracketing)
Bracketing is used to vary shooting settings such as exposure and white balance
over a series of shots. Depending on the setting, you may be able to combine several
different forms of bracketing. Use bracketing if you are unsure what settings to use or
lack the time needed to change settings during shooting. You can also store bracketing
settings and later recall them simply by turning bracketing on.
AE BKT (AE bracketing)
The camera varies the exposure of each shot. You can select
the bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. In
single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each
time the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in
sequential shooting mode the camera continues to take shots
in the following order while the shutter button is pressed all the
way down: no modifi cation, negative, positive. Number of shots:
2, 3, 5, or 7
• The camera modifi es exposure by varying aperture and shutter speed ( P mode), shutter
speed (A and M modes), or aperture (S mode). If [All] is selected for [ISO-Auto] (P. 169)
in M mode and [AUTO] is selected for [ISO] (P. 70, 80), the camera modifi es
exposure by varying ISO sensitivity.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for exposure compensation.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value selected for [EV Step].
g [EV Step] (P. 169)
• Exposure bracketing cannot be combined with FL or focus bracketing.
Bracketing
AE BKT 2F1.0EV
WB BKT A-- G--
FL BKT --
ISO BKT --
ART BKT --
Focus BKT --
Back Set
Off
2f 0.3EV
2f 0.7EV
2f 1.0EV
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV
133
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
WB BKT (WB bracketing)
Three images with different white balances (adjusted in
specifi ed color directions) are automatically created from one
shot, starting with the value currently selected for white balance.
• White balance can be varied by 2, 4, or 6 steps on each of
the A – B (Red– Blue) and G – M (Green – Magenta) axes.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for white
balance compensation.
• WB bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.
FL BKT (FL bracketing)
The camera varies fl ash level over three shots (no modifi cation
on the fi rst shot, negative on the second, and positive on the
third). The amount can be chosen from 0.3, 0.7, and 1.0 EV. In
single-frame shooting, one shot is taken each time the shutter
button is pressed; in sequential shooting, all shots are taken
while the shutter button is pressed.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value
selected for [EV Step]. g [EV Step] (P. 169)
• Flash bracketing cannot be combined with AE or focus bracketing.
ISO BKT (ISO bracketing)
The camera varies the sensitivity over three shots while keeping
the shutter speed and aperture fi xed. You can select the
bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. Each
time the shutter button is pressed, the camera shoots three
frames with the set sensitivity (or if auto sensitivity is selected,
the optimal sensitivity setting) on the fi rst shot, negative
modifi cation on the second shot, and positive modifi cation on
the third shot.
• The size of the bracketing increment does not change with the value selected for [ISO
Step]. g [ISO Step] (P. 169)
• Bracketing is performed regardless of the upper limit set with [ISO-Auto Set]. g [ISO-
Auto Set] (P. 169)
• ISO sensitivity bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.
ART BKT (ART bracketing)
Each time the shutter is released, the camera records multiple
images, each with a different art fi lter setting. You can turn art
fi lter bracketing on or off separately for each picture mode.
• Recording may take some time.
• With the exceptions of AE and FL bracketing, ART bracketing
cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.
WB BKT
3f 4Step
A-B G-M
3f 4Step
Back Set
Bracketing
AE BKT 2F1.0EV
WB BKT A-- G--
FL BKT --
ISO BKT --
ART BKT --
Focus BKT --
Back Set
Off
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV
Bracketing
AE BKT 2F1.0EV
WB BKT A-- G--
FL BKT --
ISO BKT --
ART BKT --
Focus BKT --
Back Set
Off
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV
ART BKT
Pop Art 1
Pop Art 2
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2
Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
HBack
134
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Focus BKT (Focus bracketing)
Take a series of shots at different focus positions. Focus moves
successively farther from the initial focus position. Choose the
number of shots using [Set number of shots] and the change
in focus distance using [Set focus differential]. Choose smaller
values for [Set focus differential] to narrow the change in focus
distance, larger values to widen it. If you are using a fl ash other
than the dedicated fl ash unit, you can specify the time it takes to
charge using the [#Charge Time] option.
Press the shutter button all the way down and release it
immediately. Shooting will continue until the selected number of
shots is taken or until the shutter button is pressed all the way
down again.
• Focus bracketing is not available with lenses that have
mounts conforming to the Four-Thirds standard.
• Focus bracketing ends if zoom or focus is adjusted during
shooting.
• Shooting ends when focus reaches infi nity.
• Pictures taken using focus bracketing are shot in silent
mode.
• To use the fl ash, select [Allow] for [Silent s Mode Settings] >
[Flash Mode].
g [Silent s Mode Settings] (P. 142)
• Focus bracketing cannot be combined with other forms of
bracketing.
Bracketing
AE BKT 2F1.0EV
WB BKT A-- G--
FL BKT --
ISO BKT --
ART BKT --
Focus BKT --
Back Set
Off
On
Set number of shots
003
Back Set
Back Set
Focus BKT
Focus Stacking Off
Set number of shots 99
Set focus differential 5
#Charge Time 0sec
10
1
3
Narrow
Wide
#Charge Time
30sec
Select time between shutter
release for flash recharge.
This setting is not necessary
when using an Olympus flash.
Back Set
Focus BKT (Focus Stacking)
The focus position is automatically shifted to capture 8 shots
which are then composited for a single JPEG image that is in
focus all the way from the foreground to background.
• The focus position is automatically shifted based on the
center of the focal position and 8 frames are captured in a
single shot.
• If compositing fails, the image will not be saved.
• Focus stacking ends if zoom or focus is adjusted during shooting.
• The angle of view for composited images is narrower than the original images.
• A frame indicating the fi nal crop will be shown in the display. Compose the shot with your
subject in the frame.
• Guide line selected in [Displayed Grid] (P. 168) will not be displayed.
• See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can be used with [Focus
Stacking].
• Focus stacking cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.
Focus BKT
Focus Stacking Off
Set number of shots 99
Set focus differential 5
#Charge Time 0sec
Back Set
135
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
1
Select [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 and
press the Q button.
2
1
2
Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing
Keystone Comp. Off
Off
Off
Off
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
Off
Back Set
2
After selecting [On], press I and select a bracket
shooting type.
• A menu of bracketing types will be displayed.
2
1
2
Back Set
Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing
Keystone Comp. Off
Off
Off
Off
Multiple Exposure
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
Off
HDR
Off
On
3
Highlight a bracketing type using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• The camera will display bracketing options for the
selected bracketing type.
Bracketing
AE BKT 2F1.0EV
WB BKT A-- G--
FL BKT --
ISO BKT --
ART BKT --
Focus BKT --
Back Set
4
Using the FGHI buttons, select [On] or a bracketing program.
• AE BKT
Highlight the number of shots (for example, 2f) and
press the I button to view bracketing amounts. Use the
FG buttons to highlight an amount and press Q to
select the highlighted option and return to the previous
display.
Bracketing
AE BKT 2F1.0EV
WB BKT A-- G--
FL BKT --
ISO BKT --
ART BKT --
Focus BKT --
Back Set
Off
2f 0.3EV
2f 0.7EV
2f 1.0EV
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV
• WB BKT
You will be prompted to choose a color axis (A–B or
G–M). Use the HI buttons to highlight an axis and the
FG buttons to choose the bracketing amount. Press
the Q to return to the previous display when settings
are complete.
WB BKT
3f 4Step
A-B G-M
3f 4Step
Back Set
• ART BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to display a menu
of picture modes and art fi lters. Use the FG buttons
to highlight the desired fi lters and press the Q button
to select (selected fi lters are indicated by check marks).
Press the MENU button to return to the previous
display when settings are complete.
ART BKT
Pop Art 1
Pop Art 2
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2
Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
HBack
136
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
• Focus BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to view focus
bracketing settings. Use the FG buttons to highlight
a setting and press the I button. Options will be
displayed; use the FG buttons to highlight an option
and press the Q button to return to the setting menu.
Press the Q button again to return to the bracketing
menu when settings are complete. The [Focus BKT]
menu is also used for [Focus Stacking] settings
(P. 134).
Focus BKT
Focus Stacking Off
Set number of shots 99
Set focus differential 5
#Charge Time 0sec
Back Set
5
With [On] selected, press the Q button to save changes and exit.
6
Confi rm that [On] is selected for [Bracketing] and
press the Q button.
• To save changes without enabling bracketing, press the
MENU button or highlight [Off] and press the Q button.
2
1
2
Back Set
Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing
Keystone Comp. Off
Off
Off
Off
Multiple Exposure
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
Off
HDR
Off
On
7
Take pictures.
• A t icon is displayed when bracketing is active.
• Bracketing cannot be combined with HDR, interval-timer photography, digital shift,
multiple-exposure photography, high res shots, or fi sheye compensation.
• Bracketing is not available if there is not enough space on the camera’s memory card for
the selected number of frames.
• AE, FL, and focus bracketing are not available in mode B.
137
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images (HDR)
The camera varies exposure over a series of shots, selects from each tone range
with the highest level of detail, and combines them to create a single picture with a
wide dynamic range. If the photo features a high-contrast subject, details that would
otherwise be lost in shadows or highlights will be preserved.
• This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [HDR] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press I
on the arrow pad.
2
1
2
Back Set
Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing
Keystone Comp. Off
Off
Off
Off
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Anti-Shockr/Silents
High Res Shot
#RC Mode
Off
3
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.
HDR
HDR1
Takes 4 pictures at once
at different exposures and
composites automatically into
a high contrast image.
Back Set
HDR1
Each time you take a photo, the camera will take a series of shots while varying
exposure and combine them into a single picture. Choose [HDR1] for natural-
looking results, [HDR2] for a more painterly effect.
• [ISO] is fi xed at ISO 200.
• Shutter speeds can be as slow as 4 s. Shooting will continue for up to 15 s.
• Picture mode is fi xed at [Natural] and color space at [sRGB].
• The combined picture is saved in JPEG format. If [RAW] is selected for image
quality, it will instead be recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
HDR2
3f 2.0EV Each time you take a photo, the camera will vary
exposure over a series of shots. The shots are not
combined to create a single picture. The shots can
however be combined using HDR software on a
computer or other device.
3f 2.0EV
Number of
shots Exposure
range
5f 2.0EV
3f 3.0EV
5f 3.0EV
7f 2.0EV
138
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• The camera will return to the shooting display. An c
icon will be displayed.
• The drive mode will be fi xed at T (sequential high).
c icon
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
HDR
30p
30p
4K
L
F
5
Take pictures.
• Each time you press the shutter button, the camera will take the selected number of
shots.
• In [HDR1] and [HDR2] modes, the camera will automatically combine the shots into a
single picture.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, and S.
• In mode M, the camera takes the values selected for aperture and shutter speed as a
base for HDR photography.
• Use a tripod or take similar measures to fi x the camera in place.
• The image displayed in the monitor or viewfi nder during shooting differs from the fi nal
HDR picture.
• Noise may appear in the fi nal picture when a slower shutter speed is selected in [HDR1]
or [HDR2] mode.
• The following cannot be used:
fl ash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, interval-timer photography, keystone
compensation, and fi sheye correction.
%
• [HDR] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to enable it.
g [K Button Function] (P. 107)
139
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Recording multiple exposures in a single image
(Multiple Exposure)
Take two shots and combine them into a single picture. Alternatively, you can take a
shot and combine it with an existing picture stored on the memory card.
The combined image is recorded at current image quality settings. Only RAW pictures
can be selected for multiple exposures that include an existing image.
If you record a multiple exposure with RAW selected for [KK], you can then select
it for subsequent multiple exposures using [Overlay], allowing you to create multiple
exposures combining three or more photographs.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.
1
Select [Multiple Exposure] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Multiple Exposure
Number of Frames Off
Auto Gain Off
Overlay Off
Back Set
Number of
Frames [Off]: Do not create additional multiple exposures.
[2f]: Create a multiple exposure from 2 pictures.
Auto Gain [On]: Halve the brightness of each picture in the multiple exposure.
[Off]: Do not adjust brightness the brightness of the pictures in the
multiple exposure.
Overlay
[On]: Shoot a multiple exposure that includes an existing RAW image
stored on the memory card.
[Off]: Create a multiple exposure from the next 2 pictures taken.
• [Overlay] is only available when [2f] is selected for [Number of
Frames].
3
If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you will be
prompted to choose a picture for the multiple
exposure.
• Highlight a picture using the arrow pad (FGHI) and
press the Q button.
• Only RAW images can be selected.
Overlay
RAW RAW RAW
RAW
RAW RAW RAW
Back Set
4
Press the Q button in the multiple exposure menu to save the selected
settings.
• The shooting menu will be displayed.
140
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
5
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A a icon will be displayed.
• If [Overlay] is selected, the chosen photograph will be
visible superimposed on the view through the lens.
a icon
P
1:02:03
250 F5.6 0.0
0
1023
6
Take pictures.
• The fi rst shot (or if [Overlay] is selected, the previously-chosen photograph) will be
visible superimposed on the view through the lens as you compose the next shot.
• The a icon turns green.
• Normally, a multiple exposure will be created after the second shot is taken.
• Pressing the button allows you to retake the fi rst shot.
• If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you can take additional pictures that will be overlaid
on the previously-chosen photograph.
7
Press the MENU button or press the q button to end multiple exposure
photography.
• If you end multiple exposure photography by pressing the MENU button, [Off] will be
selected for [Number of Frames] in the multiple exposure menu.
• The a icon clears from the display when multiple exposure photography ends.
• The camera will not enter sleep mode during multiple exposure photography.
• Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• RAW pictures taken using High Res Shot cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• The RAW pictures listed in the image-selection display when [On] is selected for [Overlay]
are those processed using the settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken.
• Exit multiple exposure mode before adjusting shooting settings. Some settings cannot be
adjusted while multiple exposure mode is in effect.
• Performing any of the following operations after the fi rst shot is taken ends multiple
exposure photography:
turning the camera off, pressing the q or MENU button, choosing a different shooting
mode, or connecting cables of any type. Multiple exposure is also canceled when the
battery is exhausted.
• The image-selection display for [Overlay] shows the JPEG copies of photographs taken
with RAW + JPEG selected for image quality.
• Live composite photography ([LIVE COMP]) is not available in mode B.
• The following are not available in multiple exposure mode:
HDR, bracketing, interval-timer photography, keystone compensation, and fi sheye
correction.
• Pictures taken with RAW selected for [KK] can also be overlaid during playback.
141
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Keystone correction and perspective control (Keystone Comp.)
Keystone distortion due to the infl uence of lens focal length and proximity to the subject
can be corrected, or enhanced to exaggerate the effects of perspective. Keystone
compensation can be previewed in the monitor during shooting. The corrected image is
created from a smaller crop, slightly increasing the effective zoom ratio.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.
1
Select [Keystone Comp.] in X Shooting Menu 2, and press the Q button.
2
Highlight [On], and press the Q button.
3
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• The camera will switch to the keystone compensation
display. A slider and z icon be displayed. Keystone compensation
P
250 F5.6
4
Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject
in the display.
• Rotate the front dial to make horizontal adjustments and the rear dial to make vertical
adjustments.
• Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject in the
display.
• Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the crop. The direction in which the crop
can be moved is shown by an arrow ( ).
• To cancel changes, press and hold the Q button.
5
To adjust aperture, shutter speed, and other shooting settings, press the
INFO button.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed.
• A z icon is displayed while keystone compensation is enabled. The icon is displayed
in green if adjustments have been made to keystone compensation settings.
• To return to the keystone compensation display shown in Step 4, press the INFO
button repeatedly.
6
Take pictures.
• Pictures may seem “grainy” depending on the amount of compensation performed. The
amount of compensation also determines the amount the picture will be enlarged when
cropped and whether the crop can be moved.
• Depending on the amount of compensation, you may be unable to reposition the crop.
• Depending on the amount of compensation performed, the selected AF target may not be
visible in the display. If the AF target is outside the frame, its direction is indicated by a g,
h, i, or j icon in the display.
142
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
• Pictures taken with [RAW] for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,
fi sheye correction, the digital teleconverter, movie recording,
[C-AF] and
[C-AF+TR]
AF modes, [e
-Portrait
] and art fi lter picture modes, the custom self-timer, and High Res
Shot.
• Lens converters may not produced the desired results.
• Where applicable, keystone compensation will be performed using the focal length
supplied for [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 86) or [Lens Info Settings] (P. 196).
• Be sure to provide [K Image Stabilizer] data for lenses that are not part of the Four
Thirds or Micro Four Thirds family (P. 86).
%
• [Keystone Comp.] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable keystone compensation. g [K Button Function] (P. 107)
Setting anti-shock/silent shooting (Anti-Shock r/Silent s)
By setting anti-shock/silent shooting, you can select anti-shock or silent shooting when
using sequential shooting/self-timer (P. 71).
1
Select [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q
button.
2
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Anti-Shock r
Sets the time period between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the shutter release when shooting in anti-shock
mode. Use this mode to suppress small vibrations caused by
the operation of the shutter. Anti-shock mode is available in both
sequential shooting and self-timer modes (P. 71).
Silent s
Sets the time period between the shutter button being pressed
all the way down and the shutter release when shooting in silent
mode. Use this option in settings in which the sound of the shutter
would be unwelcome. Silent mode supports both the self-timer and
sequential shooting (P. 71).
Noise Reduction s
Select [Auto] to reduce image “noise” in long exposures during
silent photography. The sound of the shutter may be audible when
noise reduction is active.
Silent s Mode
Settings
Choose whether to enable [8], [AF Illuminator], or [Flash Mode] in
silent mode.
Select [Allow] to use current settings for the selected item, [Not
Allow] to ignore current settings and disable the selected item.
143
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Setting high resolution shooting (High Res Shot)
By specifying the setting for [High Res Shot], high resolution shooting can be activated
by selecting h from options for sequential shooting/self-timer mode (P. 71).
1
Select [High Res Shot] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
High Res Shot
Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down. Use this option to
prevent blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter button
is pressed. Select [Off] to disable High Res Shot.
#Charge Time Choose how the long the camera waits for the fl ash to charge for
High Res Shots taken with the fl ash. You need not specify a value
when using an external fl ash.
• Electronic shutter is used for high resolution shooting.
• g “Using a fl ash (Flash photography)” (P. 93)
Shooting with remote control wireless fl ash (#RC Mode)
Wireless remote-control fl ash units can be used with the supplied fl ash unit for wireless
remote-control fl ash photography. g “Wireless remote control fl ash photography”
(P. 216)
144
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Using the Video Menu
Movie recording functions are set in the Video Menu.
2
1
Video Menu
nMode Settings
nButton/Dial/Lever
On
nAF/IS Settings
nSpecification Settings
nDisplay Settings
Movie R
nHDMI Output
Back Set
Option Description g
n Mode Settings [n Mode]: Choose a movie record mode.
[n Flicker Scan]: Select [On] to reduce fl icker caused by
LED lighting. Rotate the front or rear dial or use FG on
the arrow pad to choose the shutter speed at which fl icker
reduction applies.
147
n Specifi cation
Settings Sets the image quality for movie recording.
[nK]: Set a combination of image quality size and bit
rate.
[n Noise Filter]: Select a noise reduction level for
recording high-sensitivity movies.
[n Picture Mode]: Record in a picture mode suitable for
editing when set to [On].
149
n AF/IS Settings [n AF Mode]: Choose the AF mode for movie recording.
[n Image Stabilizer]: Sets image stabilization for movie
recording. 80, 86
145
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Option Description g
n Button/Dial/
Lever Set the button, dial, and lever functions for movie mode.
[n Button Function]: Sets functions to buttons for movie
mode.
[n Dial Function]: Sets the functions of the rear dial and
front dial for movie mode. If [Exposure F] is assigned to
the front or rear dial, exposure compensation is possible up
to ±3 EV (steps of 1/2 and 1 EV are also supported).
[n Fn Lever Function]: Sets functions to be switched by
the Fn lever in movie mode. The Fn lever switches to the
function set with [n Dial Function] when set to [mode1]. To
choose the function selected using the Fn lever, highlight
[mode2], press I, and choose from AF mode, AF target
mode, and AF target selection. This setting has no effect
when [mode3] is selected for [K Fn Lever Function]
(P. 164) or when [Power 1] or [Power 2] is selected for [Fn
Lever/Power Lever] (P. 164).
[n Shutter Function]: Sets the shutter button function for
movie mode. When set to [w], pressing the shutter button
initiates autofocus. Still image photography is not available.
When set to [R REC], movie recording can be started or
stopped by pressing the shutter button all the way down.
The R button cannot be used for starting or stopping
movie recording with this setting.
[n Elec. Zoom Speed]: Choose the zoom speed for power
zoom lenses. This can be used for slow zooms on your
subject and other effects. Choose from [Low], [Normal],
and [High].
—
146
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Option Description g
n Display Settings [n Control Settings]: Sets whether to display Live Control
(P. 187) and Live SCP (P. 79) in movie mode. For
setting not to display, select the item and press the Q
button to clear the check mark.
[n Info Settings]: Sets the information to be displayed
on the movie recording screen. For setting not to display,
select the item and press the Q button to clear the check
mark.
[ Time Code Settings]: Set the time codes to record for
movie mode.
Set [Time Code Mode] to [Drop Frame] to record time
codes corrected for errors with respect to recording time,
and to [Non-DF] (no drop frame) to record uncorrected time
codes.
Set [Count Up] to [Rec Run] to run time codes during
recording only, and to [Free Run] to run time codes even
while recording is stopped, including when the camera is
turned off.
In [Starting Time], set a starting time for the time code. Set
[Current Time] to set the time code for the current frame to
00. To set to 00:00:00:00, select [Reset]. You can also set
time codes using [Manual Input].
—
Movie RAudio will not be recorded in a movie when set to [Off]. 150
n HDMI Output Sets the output setting for recording movies with this
camera connected with an external device via HDMI.
[Output Mode]: Sets the video output mode. When set to
[Monitor Mode], image and camera information are output.
The camera information is not displayed on the camera
screen.
When set to [Record Mode], only image is output. The
camera information is displayed on the camera screen.
• This option is not available when a frame size of [4K] or
[C4K] is selected for [n Specifi cation Settings] > [nK]
(P. 149).
[REC Bit]: If set to [On], the REC trigger is sent from the
camera to the connected external device.
[Time Code]: If set to [On], the time code is sent from the
camera to the connected external device.
• The recording by the external device that uses the time
code as the REC trigger may be stopped in the following
cases.
- When recording an ART movie, etc., under heavy
processing load
- When switching the display between the monitor and
viewfi nder
—
147
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode (Movie Exposure Modes))
You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in P, A, S, and M
modes. This option takes effect when the mode dial is rotated to n.
1
Select [n Mode Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
2
Select [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) and press I.
3
Use FG to select an option and press the Q button.
POptimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject.
Use the front dial (r) or rear dial (o) to adjust exposure compensation.
ADepiction of background is changed by setting the aperture.
Use the front dial (r) to adjust exposure compensation and rear dial (o) to adjust
aperture.
SShutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the front dial (r) to adjust
exposure compensation and rear dial (o) to adjust shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/32000 s.
M
Aperture and shutter speed can be manually set.
Use the front dial (r) to select aperture value and the rear dial (o) to select
shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/32000 s.
ISO sensitivity can only be set manually to values between 200 and 6400.
• Blurred frames caused by such factors as the subject moving while the shutter is open
can be reduced by selecting the fastest available shutter speed.
• The low end of the shutter speed changes according to the frame rate of the movie record
mode.
• Excessive camera shake may not be compensated enough.
• When the inside of the camera becomes hot, shooting is automatically stopped to protect
the camera.
148
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (n Flicker Scan)
Banding may occur in movies fi lmed under LED lighting. Use [n Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This option is in [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) [S] and [M].
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.
1
Select [S] or [M] for [n Mode] (movie exposure modes).
2
Highlight [n Mode Settings] in the video menu and press the Q button.
3
Highlight [n Flicker Scan] and press I.
4
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the
menus.
• A P
icon
is displayed when fl icker scan is
enabled.
250.0
nP
P icon
6
Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.
• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or
the FG buttons.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no
longer visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the
P icon
will no longer be displayed. You can adjust
aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using the
front or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the fl icker
scan display.
250.0
nP
Shutter speed
7
Begin fi lming when settings are complete.
• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the fl icker
scan display. To view these items, fi rst press the INFO button to exit the fl icker scan
display.
%
• [n Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable fl icker scan. g [n Button Function] (P. 107)
149
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nK)
You can set combinations of movie image size and bit rate. The settings can be
selected from options of movie record mode (P. 89).
1
Select [n Specifi cation Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
2
Select [nK] and press I.
3
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Image size Sets the image size to [C4K] (Custom only), [4K], [FHD] (Full HD), or
[HD].
Bit rate
Sets the bit rate to [A-I] (All-Intra), [SF] (Super Fine), [F] (Fine), or [N]
(Normal).
• When [4K] or [C4K] is set for the image size, you cannot select the
bit rate.
Frame rate
Sets the frame rate to [60p], [50p], [30p], [25p], or [24p].
• [60p] and [50p] are not available in the following situations.
- When [FHD] (Full HD) is set for the image size and [A-I] (All Intra)
is set for the bit rate.
- When [C4K] or [4K] is set for the image size.
• If the image size is set to [C4K], the frame rate is locked to 24p.
• When shooting movies that will be viewed on a television, choose a
frame rate that matches the video standard used in the device, as
otherwise the movie may not play back smoothly. Video standards
vary by country or region: some use NTSC, others PAL.
- When shooting for display on NTSC devices, choose 60p (30p)
- When shooting for display on PAL devices, choose 50p (25p)
Slow or Fast
Motion
Sets slow or fast motion.
Available settings differ depending on the set frame rate.
• Slow and fast motions cannot be used in some image quality modes.
150
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Sound Recording Options (Movie R)
Adjust settings for recording sound during fi lming. You can also access settings for use
when an external microphone or recorder is connected.
1
Select [Movie R] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
2
Select [On] and press I.
3
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Recording Volume
Adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose separate values for the
built-in stereo microphone and external microphones.
[Built-In R]: Adjust the sensitivity of the camera’s built-in stereo
microphone.
[MIC R]: Adjust the sensitivity of external microphones connected
to the microphone jack.
R Volume Limiter Choose the maximum volume at which the camera will record
sound. Use this option to automatically reduce the level of sounds
above a certain volume.
Wind Noise
Reduction Reduce wind noise during audio recording.
Recording Rate Choose an audio recording format.
[96kHz/24bit]: High-quality audio.
[48kHz/16bit]: Standard-quality audio.
R Plug-in Power
Adjust settings for use with condenser microphones and other
devices that draw power from the camera.
[Off]: For devices that do not require power from the camera
(general-purpose dynamic microphones).
[On]: For devices that require power from the camera (condenser
microphones).
PCM Recorder R Link
Adjust settings for use with external IC recorders. Record a slate
tone or choose whether camera controls can be used to start and
stop recording when using an Olympus LS-100 IC recorder.
[Camera Rec. Volume]: Choose [Operative] to record sound at the
level selected with the camera, [Inoperative] to record sound at the
level selected with the recorder.
[Slate Tone]: Enable or disable slate tone recording.
[Synchronized R Rec.]: Choose whether audio recording begins
and ends at the same time as movie recording.
• Operation sounds of the lens and camera may be recorded in a movie. To prevent it from
recording, reduce the operation sounds by setting [n AF Mode] (P. 80) to [S-AF], [MF],
or [PreMF], or by minimizing the button operations of the camera.
• Sound is not recorded:
with high-speed or slow- or fast-motion movies or when k (diorama) is selected for
picture mode.
• When [Movie R] is set to [Off], O is displayed.
• Audio can only be played on devices that support the option selected for [Recording
Rate].
151
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Using the Olympus LS-100 IC Recorder
When recording audio with an Olympus LS-100 IC recorder, you can use camera
controls to record slate tones or to start and stop recording.
Connect the LS-100 using the USB cable and a third-party stereo mini-jack cable. Use
a “no resistance” cable.
• Additional information is available in the documentation provided with the LS-100. Be sure
the recorder fi rmware has been updated to the latest version.
1
Connect the IC recorder.
• When the LS-100 is connected via the micro USB connector, a message will be
displayed prompting you to choose a connection type. Select [PCM Recorder].
• If no message is displayed, adjust menu settings as follows:
MENU button G (custom menu) tab S tab [USB Mode] Select
[Auto] or [PCM Recorder]
USB adapter (supplied
USB adapter (supplied
with LS-100)
with LS-100)
USB cable (supplied with E-M5 Mark 3)
Third-party stereo mini-jack cable
2
Adjust [PCM Recorder R Link] settings:
• MENU button n (video) menu [Movie R]
[On] [PCM Recorder R Link] Press I on the
arrow pad
R Settings
RVolume Limiter Off
Recording Volume
OffWind Noise Reduction
48kHz/16bitRecording Rate
Off
RPlug-in Power
PCM Recorder R Link
Back Set
[Camera Rec. Volume]: Select [Inoperative].
[Slate Tone]: Select [On].
[Synchronized R Rec.]: Select [On].
After adjusting settings, check that [On] is selected for [Movie R] and press the
MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
3
Start fi lming.
• The LS-100 will begin recording audio.
• To record a slate tone, press and hold the Q button.
4
End fi lming.
• The LS-100 will stop recording audio.
152
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
%
• You can choose how long you have to keep the button pressed to record a slate tone.
g [Press-and-hold Time] (P. 174)
• Disconnect the USB cable when the camera is off or the recorder is not in use.
153
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Using the Playback Menu
Playback Menu
R (P. 153)
Edit (P. 153)
Print Order (P. 120)
Reset Protect (P. 158)
Reset share Order (P. 158)
Device Connection (P. 201)
2
1
Playback Menu
R
Reset Protect
On
Print Order
Edit
Reset share Order
Device Connection
Back Set
Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation Pictures for Playback
(R)
If set to [On], images in portrait orientation are automatically rotated to be displayed in
the correct orientation on the playback display.
Retouching Pictures (Edit)
Create retouched copies of pictures. In the case of RAW pictures, you can adjust the
settings in effect at the time the picture was taken, such as white balance and picture
mode (art fi lters included). With JPEG pictures, you can make simple edits such as
cropping and resizing.
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
3
Use HI to select the image to be edited and press the Q button.
• [RAW Data Edit] is displayed if a RAW image is selected, and [JPEG Edit] if a JPEG
image is selected. For images recorded in RAW+JPEG format, both [RAW Data Edit]
and [JPEG Edit] are displayed. Select the desired option from them.
4
Select [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit] and press the Q button.
RAW Data
Edit
Creates a JPEG copy of a RAW image according to the selected settings.
Current
Retouch pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG
format. Adjust the camera settings before choosing this
option. Some settings such as exposure compensation are
not applied.
Custom1 Press R and adjust settings while previewing the results
in the display. The settings are saved as [Custom1] or
[Custom2].
Custom2
ART BKT The camera creates multiple JPEG copies of each image,
one for each art fi lter selected. Select one or more fi lters
and apply them to one or more images.
154
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
JPEG Edit
The [JPEG Edit] menu contains the following options.
Shadow Adj. Brighten back-lit subjects.
Red-eye Fix Reduce “red-eye” in pictures taken with a fl ash.
PCrop pictures. Size the crop with the front or rear dial
and position it with the arrow pad.
Aspect Change the aspect ratio from the standard 4:3 to [3:2],
[16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After choosing an aspect ratio, use
the arrow pad to position the crop.
Black & White Create a black-and-white copy of the current picture.
Sepia Create a sepia copy of the current picture.
Saturation Adjust the vividness of colors. The results can be
previewed in the display.
Q
Create a resized copy 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 ×
240 pixels in size. Pictures with an aspect ratio other
than the standard 4:3 are resized to dimensions as close
as possible to the selected option.
e-Portrait Smooth complexions. The desired effect may not be
achieved if no faces are detected.
• Red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results with some pictures.
• Retouch is not available:
with pictures that were taken with another camera or edited on a computer or if the
space available on the memory card is insuffi cient.
5
Press the Q button when settings are complete.
• The selected settings will be applied.
6
Press the Q button again.
• Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the Q
button to save the retouched copy.
RAW Data Edit
Yes
No
Back Set
• To create additional copies from the same original RAW image, highlight [Reset] and
press the Q button. To exit without creating more copies, highlight [No] and press the Q
button.
• Selecting [Reset] displays the retouch menu. Repeat the process from Step 4.
• You can also edit selected pictures during playback.
q button Display a picture you want to retouch Press the Q button to view
options [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit]
• Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image.
• The image cannot be resized (Q) to the larger size than the original size.
• [P] (trimming) and [Aspect] can only be used to edit images with an aspect ratio of 4:3
(standard).
• When [ART] is selected for picture mode, [Color Space] (P. 105) will be locked at [sRGB].
155
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Combining Pictures (Image Overlay)
Overlay existing RAW photos and to create a new picture. Up to 3 pictures can be
included in the overlay.
The results can be modifi ed by adjusting brightness (gain) separately for each picture.
• The overlay is saved in the format currently selected for image quality. Overlays created
with [RAW] selected for image quality are saved in RAW format and in JPEG format using
the image quality option selected for [K2] (P. 171).
• Overlays saved in RAW format can in turn be combined with other RAW images to create
overlays containing 4 or more pictures.
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select [Image Overlay] and press the Q button.
3
Select the number of images to be overlaid and press the Q button.
4
Use FGHI to select the RAW images to be
overlaid.
• Selected pictures are marked with a v. To deselect,
press the Q button again.
• The overlaid image will be displayed if images of the
number specifi ed in step 3 are selected.
5
Adjust the gain for each image to be overlaid.
• Use HI to select an image and FG to adjust gain.
• Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check the
results in the monitor.
6
Press the Q button to display the confi rmation
dialog.
• Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
RAW RAW RAW
RAW
RAW RAW RAW
Image Overlay
Back Set
×1.5×1.5×0.3 ×0.5
Image Overlay
Back Set
156
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Creating Movie Stills (In-Movie Image Capture)
Save a still copy of a selected frame.
• This option is available only with [4K] movies recorded with the camera.
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
3
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
4
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
5
Use FG to select [In-Movie Image Capture] and press the Q button.
6
Use HI to select a frame to be saved as a still image and press the Q
button.
• The camera will save a still copy of the selected frame.
• Use the F button to rewind and the G button to advance.
157
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Trimming movies (Movie Trimming)
Cut selected footage from movies. Movies can be trimmed repeatedly to create fi les
containing only footage you want to preserve.
• This option is available only with movies recorded with the camera.
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
3
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
4
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
5
Use FG to select [Movie Trimming] and press the Q button.
• You will be prompted to choose how you want to save the edited movie.
[New File]: Save the trimmed movie in a new fi le.
[Overwrite]: Overwrite the existing movie.
[No]: Exit without trimming the movie.
• If the image is protected, you cannot select [Overwrite].
6
Highlight the desired option and press the Q button.
• You will be presented with an edit display.
7
Trim the movie.
• Use the F button to skip to the fi rst frame and the G button to skip to the last frame.
• Using the front or rear dial, select the fi rst frame of the footage you want to delete and
press the Q button.
• Using the front or rear dial, highlight the last frame of the footage you want to delete
and press the Q button.
8
Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The edited movie will be saved.
• To select different footage, highlight [No] and press the Q button.
• If you selected [Overwrite], you will be prompted to choose whether to trim additional
footage from the movie. To trim additional footage, highlight [Continue] and press the
Q button.
158
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Removing Protection from All Pictures (Reset Protect)
Protections of multiple images can be canceled at a time.
1
Select [Reset Protect] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
Cancelling a share order (Reset share Order)
Cancel share orders that are set on images.
1
Select [Reset share Order] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q
button.
2
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
159
EN
Menu functions (Setup menu)
4
Using the setup menu
Adjust basic camera settings. Examples include language
selection and monitor brightness. The setup menu also
contains options used during the initial setup process.
2
1
Setup Menu
Card Setup
s
English
j±0 k±0
0.5sec
W
X
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
’19.12.01 12:30:00
Back Set
Option Description g
Card Setup Format the card and delete all images. 160
X (Date/time setting) Set the camera clock. 27
W (Changing the
display language) Choose a language for camera menus and guides. 29
s (Monitor
brightness adjustment) You can adjust the
brightness and color
temperature of the
monitor. Color temperature
adjustment is only
applied to the monitor
display during playback.
Use HI to highlight j
(color temperature) or k
(brightness) and FG to
adjust the value.
-
2
j
+1
k
s
Vivid Natural
Back Set —
Press the INFO button to switch the saturation of the
monitor between [Natural] and [Vivid] settings.
Rec View Sets whether to display the captured image on the
monitor after shooting, and the length of time for the
display. This is useful for a brief check of the picture you
have taken. You can shoot the next shot by pressing the
shutter button halfway even while the captured image is
displayed on the monitor.
[0.3sec] – [20sec]: Sets the length of time (seconds) to
display the captured image on the monitor.
[Off]: The captured image is not displayed on the monitor.
[Auto q]: Displays the captured image, and then
switches to playback mode. This is useful for erasing a
picture after checking it.
—
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings Adjust settings for connection to Wi-Fi/Bluetooth-
compatible smartphones using the camera’s wireless
function. 160
Firmware Displays the fi rmware versions of the camera and
connected accessories. Check the versions when you
inquire about the camera or accessories or when you
download the software.
—
160
EN
Menu functions (Setup menu)
4
Formatting the card (Card Setup)
Cards must be formatted with this camera before fi rst use or after being used with
other cameras or computers.
All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card is
formatted.
When formatting a used card, confi rm there are no images that you still want to keep
on the card. g “Usable cards” (P. 211)
1
Select [Card Setup] in the d Setup Menu and press
the Q button.
• If there is data on the card, menu items appear. Select
[Format] and press the Q button.
Back Set
Card Setup
All Erase
Format
2
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• Formatting is performed.
Deleting all images (Card Setup)
All images on a card can be deleted at a time. Protected images are not deleted.
1
Select [Card Setup] in the d Setup Menu and press
the Q button.
2
Select [All Erase] and press the Q button.
Card Setup
All Erase
Format
Back Set
3
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• All images are deleted.
Wireless LAN Options (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)
Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Frame and shoot pictures remotely
from a smartphone, or leave the camera off and view pictures on your smartphone
while on the road. For information on establishing a connection and using these
features, see “5. Connecting the camera to a smartphone” (P. 200).
Availability Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®. Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®,
for example in settings in which their use is prohibited, without
changing network settings (P. 207).
Connection Password Change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® password.
Power-off Standby Choose whether the camera will connect to smartphones while
off.
Reset Settings Restore defaults for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings].
161
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Using the custom menus
Camera settings can be customized using the G Custom Menu.
Custom Menu
J/K/L/IAF/MF (P. 161)
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
Custom Menu
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
mode2
S1/C2/M1
S-AF
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KC-AF Center Priority
KC-AF Center Start
±0
Back Set
MButton/Dial/Lever (P. 164)
N/ORelease/j/Image Stabilizer (P. 165)
P/Q/R/SDisp/8/PC (P. 166)
T/U/VExp/ISO/BULB/p (P. 169)
W#Custom (P. 170)
XK/WB/Color (P. 171)
Y/ZRecord/Erase (P. 172)
aEVF (P. 173)
b/cK Utility (P. 174)
J AF/MF
Option Description g
K AF Mode
Choose the AF mode for still image shooting.
80
K AEL/AFL Customize AF and AE lock. 175
AF Scanner Choose the type of AF scan* performed in autofocus mode
when the camera is unable to focus or the scene lacks
contrast.
* Scans whole range from minimum range to infi nity for
focus point when the camera cannot focus on the subject
or the contrast is not clear.
[mode1]: AF Scanner is not activated.
[mode2]: An AF scan is performed only once at the start of
the focus operation.
[mode3]: AF Scanner is activated.
—
K C-AF
Sensitivity Sets the tracking sensitivity for C-AF. —
K C-AF Center
Start When used in combination with an AF-target mode other
than single target, [C-AF] and [C-AF+TR] focus on the
center of the selected group only during the initial scan.
During later scans, the camera will focus using the
surrounding targets. Combining this option with an AF-target
mode that covers a wide area makes it easier to focus on
erratically-moving subjects.
177
K C-AF Center
Priority When focusing using group- or custom-target AF in [C-AF]
mode, the camera always assigns priority to the center
target in the selected group for a repeated series of focus
operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using the
center focus target will it focus using the surrounding targets
in the selected focus group. This helps you track subjects
that are moving quickly but relatively predictably. C-AF
center priority is recommended in most situations.
178
MENU G J
162
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
K AF/MF
Option Description g
NMode Settings Choose the size and shape of the AF target for AF target
mode. To hide an item, select the item and press the Q
button to clear the check mark. 65
AF Area Pointer [On1]: Displays the AF target frame in green.
[On2]: Displays the AF target frame in green while the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
If you select [Off], the AF target frame will not be displayed
during confi rmation.
—
• To enable cluster AF targeting
when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb],
or [C-AF] is chosen for [K AF
Mode] (P. 80), select [On2]
for [AF Area Pointer]. The
camera will display AF targets
for all areas that are in focus.
AF Targeting Pad If [On] is selected, the AF target can be positioned by
tapping the monitor during viewfi nder photography. Tap the
monitor and slide your fi nger to position the AF target.
• When set to [On], drag operation can be disabled or
enabled by double-tapping the monitor.
• [AF Targeting Pad] can also be used with zoom frame AF
(P. 68).
—
N Set Home Choose the home position AF target mode, AF target
selection mode, and AF mode. Press the Q button to select
the desired options in the [N Set Home] display. p
appears in the AF target selection display while you choose
a home position.
179
N Custom
Settings You can change the dial and FGHI button functions for
the AF Area screen.
• To use the settings stored in [Set 2], highlight [Set 2] in the
[N Custom Settings] menu and press the Q button.
• You can switch to [Set 2] by pressing the INFO button in
the AF-target selection display.
—
MENU G K
163
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
L AF/MF
Option Description g
AF Limiter Limits the AF area when turned [On].
[Distance settings]: You can register the AF Limiter area.
You can register up to 3 distance areas.
Numerical value and unit (m, ft) can be set. The distance is
approximate and not exact.
[Release Priority]: If [On] is selected, the shutter can be
released while AF Limiter is operating even when the
camera is not in focus.
• AF Limiter is not available in the following cases.
- When the focus limiter is enabled on the lens.
- When using focus bracketing
- While in the movie mode or recording a movie
—
AF Illuminator Select [Off] to disable the AF illuminator. —
I Face Priority You can select the face priority or eye priority AF mode. 67
AF Focus Adj. Focal location adjustment for phase-difference AF can be
fi ne tuned within a range of ±20 steps. —
I AF/MF
Option Description g
Preset MF
distance Sets the Preset MF focus position. Numerical value and
unit (m, ft) can be set. The distance is approximate and not
exact. —
MF Assist Automatically switch to zoom or peaking in manual focus
mode by rotating the focus ring. 180
MF Clutch Selecting [Inoperative] prevents the lens MF clutch and
snapshot focus being used for manual focus. To focus
manually, slide the focus ring forward. 213
Focus Ring You can customize how the lens adjusts to the focal point by
selecting the rotational direction of the focus ring. —
Bulb/Time
Focusing You can change the focus position during exposure by using
manual focus (MF). When set to [Off], rotation of the focus
ring is disabled. 180
Reset Lens When set to [Off], the focus position of the lens is not reset
even when the power is turned off. When set to [On], the
focus of power zoom lenses is also reset. —
MENU G L
MENU G I
164
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
M Button/Dial/Lever
Option Description g
K Button
Function Choose the function assigned to the selected button. 107
qR Function Choose the role played by the R button during playback.
[h]: Create or modify a “share order” by marking pictures
for upload to a smartphone.
[H]: Select multiple pictures.
—
K Dial Function You can change the function of the front dial and rear dial. —
Dial Direction Choose the direction in which the dial is rotated to adjust
shutter speed or aperture. Change the program shift
direction in which the dial is rotated. —
K Fn Lever
Function Choose the function performed by the Fn lever. 181
Fn Lever/Power
Lever Use the Fn lever as a power switch.
[Fn]: Follows settings for the Fn lever function.
[Power 1]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 1, and off when in position 2.
[Power 2]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 2, and off when in position 1.
When [Power 1] or [Power 2] is set, the ON/OFF lever
(power lever), [K Fn Lever Function] and [n Fn Lever
Function] are disabled.
—
K Elec. Zoom
Speed Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses zoom in or
out when the zoom ring is rotated. Adjust zoom speed if it is
so quick that you fi nd it hard to frame your subject. Choose
from [Low], [Normal], and [High].
—
MENU G M
165
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
N Release/j/Image Stabilizer
Option Description g
S-AF Release
Priority If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released even when
the camera is not in focus. This option can be set separately
for S-AF and C-AF modes (P. 80). —
C-AF Release
Priority
jL Settings Choose frame advance rates and shot limits for [j],
[♦j], and [♥j] modes. You can also adjust Pro Capture
settings, including the frame advance rate (p only),
number of frames buffered, and the shot limit. Figures for
sequential shooting speed are the approximate maximums.
182
jH Settings
Flicker Reduction [ Anti-Flicker LV]: Reduce fl icker during live view under
some kinds of lighting, including fl uorescent lamps. If [Auto]
does not have the desired effect, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz]
according to the frequency of the local power supply.
[ Anti-Flicker Shooting]: The camera automatically detects
the fl icker frequency and times the shutter release
accordingly.
184
O Release/j/Image Stabilizer
Option Description g
K Image
Stabilizer Sets image stabilization for still image shooting. 86
j Image
Stabilizer Sets the priority function during sequential shooting.
[Fps Priority]: Shooting speed gets priority over image
stabilization. The sensor will not be reset to the center
during sequential shooting.
[IS Priority]: Image stabilization gets priority over shooting
speed. The sensor will be reset to the center per frame of
sequential shooting. The shooting speed will drop slightly.
—
Half Way Rls
With IS When set to [Off], the IS (Image Stabilization) function while
the shutter button is pressed halfway will not be activated. —
Lens I.S. Priority Select [On] to give priority to lens on-board image
stabilization when shooting with third-party lenses. [S-IS1]
will be used when [S-IS AUTO] is selected for [K Image
Stabilizer] (P. 86).
• This option has no effect on lenses that are equipped with
an image stabilization switch.
—
MENU G N
MENU G O
166
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
P Disp/8/PC
Option Description g
K Control
Settings Choose the controls displayed in each shooting mode.
Controls
Shooting mode
BP/A/S/
M/BART SCN
Live Control (P. 187) 
Live SCP (P. 79) 
Live Guide (P. 49) –––
Art Menu (P. 55) –––
Scene Menu (P. 50) –––
Press the INFO button to switch the screen contents.
186
G/Info Settings Choose the information displayed when the INFO button
is pressed.
[q Info]: Choose the information displayed in full frame
playback.
[qa Info]: Choose the information displayed in magnifi ed
playback.
[LV-Info]: Choose the information displayed when the
camera is in shooting mode.
[G Settings]: Choose the information displayed in index
and calendar playback.
188,
189
Picture Mode
Settings Select a function to display in the picture mode type
selection screen (P. 98). To hide an item, select the item
and press the Q button to clear the check mark. —
j/Y Settings Select a function to display in the sequential shooting/self-
timer function selection screen (P. 71). To hide an item,
select the item and press the Q button to clear the check
mark.
—
Multi Function
Settings Select a multi function (P. 113) option. When not using this
option, select the item and press the Q button to clear the
check mark. —
MENU G P
167
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Q Disp/8/PC
Option Description g
Live View Boost Shoot while checking the subject even under low-light
conditions. In B mode, you can use this setting when
shooting with BULB/TIME shooting and live composite.
[Off]: Preview exposure in live view. Exposure can be
previewed before shooting.
• This option does not apply during bulb or time
photography.
[On1]: Exposure preview disabled; brightness is adjusted for
ease of viewing. The brightness of the preview differs from
the fi nal photograph.
[On2]: As for [On1] but brighter. Choose when framing shots
of the night sky or the like.
• The brightness of the preview differs from the fi nal
photograph. Subject motion may also appear slightly jerky.
—
Art LV Mode [mode1]: The fi lter effect is always displayed.
[mode2]: Priority is given to smooth display while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. The quality of art fi lter effect
previews may be affected.
—
LV Close Up
Settings [LV Close Up Mode]: When set to [mode1], pressing the
button halfway in the magnifi ed live view returns to the
magnifi ed frame display. When set to [mode2], pressing the
button halfway in the magnifi ed live view switches to the
Zoom AF display.
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust
display brightness for ease of viewing during focus zoom.
When set to [Off], the magnifi ed area is displayed with the
brightness of live view before magnifi cation. This is useful to
check the focus when shooting in backlit locations.
—
qa Default
Setting Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up
playback). 189
z Settings [z Lock]: Select [On] to maintain the aperture at the
selected value even when releasing the button.
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust
display brightness for ease of viewing during depth-of-fi eld
preview.
—
MENU G Q
168
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
R Disp/8/PC
Option Description g
Grid Settings Sets the guide line display that appears when shooting.
[Display Color]: Sets the guide line color and opacity. Can
be set to [Preset 1] and [Preset 2].
[Displayed Grid]: Select [w], [x], [y], [X], [x] or [1] to
display a grid on the monitor.
[Apply Settings to EVF]: If [On] is selected, the guides
shown in the monitor will also be displayed in the viewfi nder
when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. The
setting selected in [EVF Grid Settings] will be invalid.
—
Peaking Settings You can change the edge enhancement color and intensity.
The edge enhancement color (red, yellow, white, black) and
intensity (Standard, Low, High), and the brightness of the
peaking background (On, Off) can be set.
• If [Image Brightness Adj.] is set to [On], the brightness of
live view is adjusted to enhance the enhancement color.
180
Histogram
Settings [Highlight]: Choose the lower bound for the highlight display.
[Shadow]: Choose the upper bound for the shadow display. 188
Mode Guide Select [On] to display a help for the selected mode when
the mode dial is rotated to a new setting. 34
Selfi e Assist Selecting [On] optimizes the display for self-portraits when
the monitor is in the self-portrait position. 190
S Disp/8/PC
Option Description g
8 (Beep sound) When set to [Off], you can turn off the beep sound that is
emitted when the focus locks by pressing the shutter button. —
HDMI [Output Size]: Selecting the digital video signal format for
connecting to a TV via an HDMI cable.
[HDMI Control]: Select [On] to allow the camera to be
operated using remotes for TVs that support HDMI control.
This option takes effect when pictures are displayed on a
TV.
[Output Frame Rate]: Select the output frame rate from [50p
Priority] or [60p Priority] for using the camera connected to
a TV with an HDMI cable.
191
USB Mode Choose a mode for connecting the camera to a computer.
Choose [Auto] to display USB mode options every time the
camera is connected. 208
MENU G R
MENU G S
169
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p 
Option Description g
Exposure Shift Adjust correct exposure separately for each metering mode.
• This reduces the number of exposure compensation
options available in the selected direction.
• The effects are not visible in the monitor. To make
normal adjustments to the exposure, perform exposure
compensation (P. 64).
—
EV Step Choose the size of the increments used when selecting
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and other
exposure parameters. —
ISO Step Select the increments available for choosing ISO sensitivity. —
ISO-Auto Set [Upper Limit/Default]: Choose the maximum and default ISO
sensitivity used when [AUTO] is selected for ISO. Select
[Upper Limit] to choose the maximum sensitivity, [Default] to
choose the default sensitivity. The maximum is 6400.
[Lowest S/S Setting]: Choose the shutter speed at which the
camera starts raising ISO sensitivity automatically in modes
P and A. Choose [Auto] to let the camera choose a shutter
speed automatically.
—
ISO-Auto Choose the shooting modes in which [AUTO] ISO sensitivity
is available.
[P/A/S]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in all
modes except M.
[All]: Auto ISO sensitivity selection is available in all modes.
—
K Noise Filter Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at high
ISO sensitivities. —
Noise Reduct. This function reduces the noise that is generated during
long exposures.
[Auto]: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds,
or when the internal temperature of the camera has risen.
[On]: Noise reduction is performed with every shot.
[Off]: Noise reduction off.
• The time required for noise reduction is shown in the
display.
• [Off] is selected automatically during sequential shooting.
• This function may not work effectively with some shooting
conditions or subjects.
—
MENU G T
170
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p 
Option Description g
Bulb/Time Timer Choose the maximum exposure for bulb and time
photography. —
Bulb/Time Monitor Set the monitor brightness when [BULB], [TIME], or [LIVE
COMP] is used. —
Live Bulb Choose the display interval during shooting. The number
of update times is limited. The frequency drops at high ISO
sensitivities. Choose [Off] to disable the display. Tap the
monitor or press the shutter button halfway to refresh the
display.
192
Live Time 192
Composite
Settings Set an exposure time to be the reference in composite
photography. 193
K Flicker Scan Reduce fl icker under LED lighting. 194
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p 
Option Description g
Metering Choose a metering mode according to the scene. 82
AEL Metering Choose the metering method used to meter exposure when
exposure is locked using the AEL/AFL button. This allows
you to use metering method when exposure is locked by
pressing the shutter button halfway and another when
exposure is locked by pressing the AEL/AFL button.
[Auto]: Exposure is metered using the method selected for
[Metering] (P. 82).
—
N Spot Metering Choose whether the [Spot], [Spot Hilight], and [Spot
Shadow] spot metering options meter the selected AF
target.
• [I Face Priority] turns off automatically.
• The selected option takes effect when M (single target)
or o (small target) is selected as the AF-target mode
(P. 65).
—
W #Custom
Option Description g
#X-Sync. Choose the shutter speed used when the fl ash fi res. 195
#Slow Limit Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a fl ash
is used. 195
x+FWhen set to [On], the exposure compensation value is
added to the fl ash compensation value. 64, 97
#+WB Adjust white balance for use with a fl ash. —
MENU G U
MENU G V
MENU G W
171
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
X K/WB/Color
Option Description g
K Set You can select the JPEG image quality mode from
combinations of three image sizes and three compression
rates.
1) Use HI to select a
combination ([K1] –
[K4]) and use FG to
change.
2) Press the Q button.
K Set
Pixel Count Yarge
1
SF
Y
2
F
Y
3
N
Y
4
N
X
Back Set
Compression
rate
Image size
88,
129,
196
Pixel Count Choose the pixel count for [X]- and [W]-size images.
1) Select [Xiddle] or [Wmall]
and press I.
2) Choose a pixel count and
press the Q button.
Pixel Count
X
iddle
3200×2400
W
mall
1280×960
Back Set
88,
129,
196,
241
Shading Comp. Choose [On] to correct peripheral illumination according to
the type of lens.
• Compensation is not available for teleconverters or
extension tubes.
• Noise may be visible at the edges of photographs taken at
high ISO sensitivities.
—
WB Set the white balance. You can also fi ne-tune the white
balance for each mode. 83
All x[All Set]: Use the same white balance compensation in all
modes except [CWB].
[All Reset]: Set white balance compensation for all modes
except [CWB] to 0.
—
W Keep Warm
Color Select [On] to preserve “warm” colors in pictures taken
under incandescent lighting. 84
Color Space You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly
reproduced when shot images are regenerated on a monitor
or using a printer. 105
MENU G X
172
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Y Record/Erase
Option Description g
File Name [Auto]: Even when a new card is inserted, the fi le numbers
are retained from the previous card. File numbering
continues from the last number used or from the highest
number available on the card.
[Reset]: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers
starts at 100 and the fi le name starts at 0001. If a card
containing images is inserted, the fi le numbers start at the
number following the highest fi le number on the card.
—
Edit Filename Choose how image fi les are named by editing the portion of
the fi lename highlighted below in gray.
sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg Pmdd
Adobe RGB: _mdd0000.jpg mdd
—
dpi Settings Choose the print resolution. —
Copyright
Settings* Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to
new photographs. Names can be up to 63 characters long.
[Copyright Info.]: Select [On] to include the names of the
photographer and copyright holder in the Exif data for new
photographs.
[Artist Name]: Enter the name of the photographer.
[Copyright Name]: Enter the name of the copyright holder.
1) Select characters from 1 and press the Q button.
The selected characters appear in 2.
2) Repeat Step 1 to complete the name, then highlight
[END] and press the Q button.
• To delete a character, press the INFO button to
place the cursor in the name area 2, highlight
the character, and press .
!”#$%& ()*+, - . /
01234567
’
89 : ; <=>?
@
ABCDEFGH I J KLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ []_
a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END
opq r s t uvwx yz {}
ABCDE
Delete
Copyright Name 05/63
Cancel Set
2
1
* OLYMPUS does not accept liability for damages arising
from disputes involving the use of [Copyright Settings].
Use at your own risk.
—
Lens Info Settings Save lens info for up to 10 lenses that do not automatically
supply info to the camera. 196
MENU G Y
173
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Z Record/Erase
Option Description g
Quick Erase If [On] is selected, pressing the button in the playback
display will immediately delete the current image. —
RAW+JPEG Erase Choose the action performed when a photograph recorded
at a setting of RAW+JPEG is erased in single-frame
playback.
[JPEG]: Only the JPEG copy is erased.
[RAW]: Only the RAW copy is erased.
[RAW+JPEG]: Both copies are erased.
• Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted when
selected images are deleted or when [All Erase] (P. 160)
is selected.
88,
119,
129
Priority Set Choose the default selection ([Yes] or [No]) for confi rmation
dialogs. —
a EVF
Option Description g
EVF Auto Switch If [Off] is selected, the viewfi nder will not turn on when
you put your eye to the viewfi nder. Use the u button to
choose the display. —
EVF Adjust Adjust viewfi nder brightness and hue.
Brightness is automatically adjusted when [EVF Auto
Luminance] is set to [On]. The contrast of the information
display is also adjusted automatically.
—
EVF Style Choose the viewfi nder display style. 197
V Info Settings Like the monitor, the viewfi nder can be used to display
histograms, highlights and shadows, and level gauge. The
level gauge is available when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is set in
[EVF Style].
—
EVF Grid Settings Choose the type and color of framing grid displayed in the
viewfi nder when [Off] is selected for [Grid Settings] > [Apply
Settings to EVF] in G Custom Menu R and [Style 1] or
[Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. Choose the framing grid
from [w], [x], [y], [X], [x] or [1].
—
V Half Way Level If set to [Off], the level gauge will not be displayed when the
shutter button is pressed halfway down. The level gauge is
available when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is set in [EVF Style]. —
S-OVF Select [On] for a viewfi nder display similar to an optical
viewfi nder. Selecting [S-OVF] makes the details in shadows
easier to see.
• is displayed in the viewfi nder when [S-OVF] starts.
• The display is not adjusted for settings such as white
balance, exposure compensation, and picture mode.
—
MENU G Z
MENU G a
174
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
b K Utility
Option Description g
Pixel Mapping The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check
and adjust the image pickup device and image processing
functions. 223
Press-and-hold
Time Set the press-and-hold time until the function assigned to
the button operates, from [0.5 sec] to [3.0 sec]. —
Level Adjust You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge.
[Reset]: Resets adjusted values to the default settings.
[Adjust]: Sets the current camera orientation as the 0
position.
—
Touchscreen
Settings Activate the touch screen. Choose [Off] to disable the touch
screen. —
Menu Recall Set [Recall] to display the cursor at the last position of
operation when you display a menu. The cursor position will
be retained even when you turn off the camera. —
Fisheye
Compensation Correct fi sheye distortion when shooting with fi sheye
lenses. 198
c K Utility
Option Description g
Backlit LCD If no operations are performed for the selected period, the
backlight will dim to save battery power. The backlight will
not dim if [Hold] is selected. —
Sleep The camera will enter sleep (energy saving) mode if no
operations are performed for the selected period. The
camera can be reactivated by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
26
Auto Power Off When in sleep mode, the camera will automatically turn off
after the set time has elapsed. —
Quick Sleep Mode If [On] is selected, the camera will immediately enter
energy-saving mode during viewfi nder photography
(P. 32), reducing the drain on the battery. You can choose
the backlight and sleep times. Energy-saving mode ends
when the shutter button is pressed. The camera will not
enter energy-saving mode during live view or while the
viewfi nder is on.
An “ECO” icon is displayed in the super control panel when
[On] is selected.
—
Certifi cation Display certifi cation icons. —
MENU G b
MENU G c
175
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button
(K AEL/AFL)
MENU G J [K AEL/AFL]
Autofocus and metering can be performed by pressing the
button to which AEL/AFL has been assigned. Choose a
mode for each focus mode.
mode1
S-AF AEL/AFL
ExposureFully
Half Way AEL/S-AF
AEL
AEL
AFL
Back Set
Assignments of AEL/AFL function
Mode
Shutter button function AEL/AFL Button
function
Half-press Full press When holding down
AEL/AFL
Focus Exposure Focus Exposure Focus Exposure
S-AF
mode1 S-AF Locked – – – Locked
mode2 S-AF – – Locked – Locked
mode3 – Locked – – S-AF –
C-AF
mode1 C-AF start Locked Locked – – Locked
mode2 C-AF start – Locked Locked – Locked
mode3 – Locked Locked – C-AF start –
mode4 – – Locked Locked C-AF start –
MF
mode1 – Locked – – – Locked
mode2 – – – Locked – Locked
mode3 – Locked – – S-AF –
176
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
C-AF Tracking Sensitivity (K C-AF Sensitivity)
MENU G J [K C-AF Sensitivity]
Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject
while focusing with [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] selected for [K AF Mode]. This can help
autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent the camera refocusing when an
object passes between the subject and the camera.
• Choose from fi ve levels of tracking sensitivity.
• The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity. Choose positive values for subjects that
suddenly enter the frame, that are moving rapidly away from the camera, or that change
speed or stop suddenly while moving toward or away from the camera.
• The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Choose negative values to prevent the
camera refocusing when the subject is briefl y obscured by other objects or to prevent the
camera focusing on the background when you are unable to keep the subject in the AF
target.
1
Highlight [K C-AF Sensitivity] in G Custom Menu
J and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
A1. AF/MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
mode2
S1/C2/M1
S-AF
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KC-AF Center Priority
KC-AF Center Start
±0
Back Set
2
Highlight a setting using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• G Custom Menu J will be displayed.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
A1. AF/MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
mode2
S1/C2/M1
S-AF
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KC-AF Center Priority
KC-AF Center Start
±0
Back Set
0
+2
+1
0
-
1
-
2
High
Low
3
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
177
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
C-AF Starting Focus Target (K C-AF Center Start)
MENU G J [K C-AF Center Start]
When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single target, [C-AF] and
[C-AF+TR] focus on the center of the selected group only during the initial scan. During
later scans, the camera will focus using the surrounding targets. Combining this option
with an AF-target mode that covers a wide area makes it easier to focus on erratically-
moving subjects.
1
Highlight [K C-AF Center Start] in G Custom
Menu J and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
A1. AF/MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
mode2
S1/C2/M1
S-AF
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KC-AF Center Priority
KC-AF Center Start
±0
Back Set
2
Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Start] will apply
and then press the Q button.
• Selected modes are marked with a v. To deselect,
press the Q button again.
KC-AF Center Start
q
N
r
s
HBack
3
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• This option is not available when [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 178) is enabled.
178
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
C-AF Center Target Priority (K C-AF Center Priority)
MENU G J [K C-AF Center Priority]
When focusing using group-target AF in [C-AF] mode, the camera always assigns
priority to the center target in the selected group for a repeated series of focus
operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using the center focus target will
it focus using the surrounding targets in the selected focus group. This helps you
track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively predictably. Center priority is
recommended in most situations.
1
Highlight [K C-AF Center Priority] in G Custom
Menu J and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
A1. AF/MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
mode2
S1/C2/M1
S-AF
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KC-AF Center Priority
KC-AF Center Start
±0
Back Set
2
Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Priority] will apply
and then press the Q button.
• Selected modes are marked with a v. To deselect,
press the Q button again.
KC-AF Center Priority
N
r
s
HBack
3
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
179
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Choosing the AF Home Position (N Set Home)
MENU G K [N Set Home]
Choose the home position for the [N Home] feature.
The [N Home] feature lets you recall a previously-saved “home position” for
autofocus at the touch of a button. This item is used to choose the home position. To
access [N Set Home], assign it to a control using [K Button Function] (P. 107).
AF Mode Choose the home position autofocus mode.
AF Target Mode Choose the home position AF target mode. Only options selected for
[NMode Settings] (P. 162) are available.
AF Target Point Choose the home position focus target.
1
Highlight [N Set Home] in G Custom Menu K
and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
A2. AF/MF
NMode Settings
NSet Home
Off
On1
AF Targeting Pad
AF Area Pointer
NCustom Settings
Back Set
2
Highlight a setting you wish to store with the home
position and press the Q button.
• Selected items are marked with a v. Items marked
with a v are included in the home position.
NSet Home
AF Mode
AF Target Mode
AF Target Point
H
S-AF
q
Back
3
Press I on the arrow pad to display options for the
highlighted setting.
• Choose settings for the home position.
S-AF
q
Back Set
NSet Home
AF Mode
AF Target Mode
AF Target Point
S-AF
C-AF
MF
S-AF+MF
C-AF+TR
Preset MF
4
Press the Q button to save changes when settings are complete.
• The settings list will be displayed.
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit when settings are complete.
180
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Manual Focus Assist (MF Assist)
MENU G I [MF Assist]
This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of the
subject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnifi ed. When you stop
operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display.
Magnify Magnifi es a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnifi ed can be
set in advance using AF target. g “Choosing a Focus Target (AF
Target Point)” (P. 66)
Peaking Displays clearly defi ned outlines with edge enhancement. You can
select the enhancement color and intensity. g [Peaking Settings]
(P. 168)
• [Peaking] can be displayed using button operations. The display is switched every time
the button is pressed. Assign the switching function to one of the buttons in advance using
Button Function (P. 107).
• Press the INFO button to change the color and intensity when Peaking is displayed.
• When Peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced more strongly.
This is no guarantee of accurate focusing.
Adjusting Focus During Exposures (Bulb/Time Focusing)
MENU G I [Bulb/Time Focusing]
You can adjust focus manually while shooting in B (bulb) mode. This allows you to
defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.
1
Highlight [Bulb/Time Focusing] in G Custom Menu
I and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
A4. AF/MF
Preset MF distance
Focus Ring
Operative
On
On
MF Clutch
MF Assist
Reset Lens
Bulb/Time Focusing
Back Set
2
Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
[Off]: The focus position cannot be adjusted manually during an exposure.
[On]: The focus position can be adjusted manually during an exposure.
3
Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• G Custom Menu I will be displayed.
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
181
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function)
MENU G M [K Fn Lever Function]
Choose the role played by the Fn lever.
The Fn lever can be used to choose the roles of the front and rear dials or to recall
focus settings. It can also be used to select movie mode.
This setting takes effect in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes). The
option selected using [n Fn Lever Function] in the n video menu take effect in n
(movie) mode (P. 145).
Mode Fn lever position 1 Fn lever position 2
Off The Fn lever function is turned off.
mode1 Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions for Positions 1
and 2 conform to the setting selected for [K Dial Function] (P. 164).
mode2 Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AF Mode],
[AF Target Mode], and [AF Target Point].
mode3 Sets the shooting mode selected
by the mode dial. Switches to the movie mode.
182
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Burst Shooting Options (jL Settings/jH Settings)
MENU G N [jL Settings]/[jH Settings]
Adjust settings for sequential shooting modes, including the maximum frame advance
rate and number of shots per burst. Shooting ends if the maximum number of shots is
reached while the shutter button is pressed all the way down.
Choose the advance rate and number of shots per burst for S (sequential low) and T
(sequential high) modes.
jL Settings
(sequential low
options)
Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for
S (sequential low), ♦S (anti-shock sequential low), and ♥S (silent
sequential low) modes. You can also adjust settings for q (Pro Capture
Low) mode (P. 75).
• S and ♦S modes:
[Max fps]: 1–6 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
• ♥S mode:
[Max fps]: 1–10 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
• q mode:
[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–14
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.
jH Settings
(sequential high
options)
Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for T
(sequential high) and ♥T (silent sequential high) modes. You can also
adjust settings for p (Pro Capture High) mode (P. 75).
• T mode:
[Max fps]: 5–10 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
• ♥T mode:
[Max fps]: 15, 20, or 30 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
• p mode:
[Max fps]: 15, 20, or 30 fps
[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–14
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.
183
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
1
Highlight [jL Settings] or [jH Settings] in
G Custom Menu N and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority
jH Settings
On
Off
jL Settings
C-AF Release Priority
Flicker Reduction
Back Set
2
Highlight [j/♦j] (or, in the case of
[jH Settings], [j]), [♥j], or [J] using FG
on the arrow pad and press the I button.
• The camera will display options for the selected item.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
Back Set
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority
jH Settings
On
Off
jL Settings
C-AF Release Priority
Flicker Reduction
jƇj
Ɔj
J
3
Choose a setting for [Max fps].
• Highlight [Max fps] using the FG buttons and press
the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
Ɔj
Max fps 10fps
Frame Count Limiter Off
Back Set
4
Choose a setting for [Pre-shutter Frames].
• This option will only be available if you selected [J] in
Step 2.
• Highlight [Pre-shutter Frames] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• To disable pre-capture, select [0].
J
8
Frame Count Limiter Off
Pre-shutter Frames
Back Set
8
5
Choose the maximum number of shots per burst
([Frame Count Limiter]).
• Highlight [Frame Count Limiter] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• To keep shooting as long as the shutter release button
is pressed all the way down, select [Off].
• To choose a maximum number of shots, highlight
the current setting and press the I button to display
options. Highlight digits using the HI buttons and use
the FG buttons to change.
Ɔj
10fps
Off
Back Set
Max fps
Frame Count Limiter
• The maximum number of shots per burst includes shots captured while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. g “Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture
shooting)” (P. 74)
• Press the Q button to save changes to settings.
6
Press the Q button.
• G Custom Menu N will be displayed.
7
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
184
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction)
MENU G N [Flicker Reduction]
When shooting under fl uorescent or other artifi cial workplace or outdoor lighting, you
may notice fl icker in the live view display or uneven exposure in photos taken at fast
shutter speeds. This item reduces these effects.
Reducing Flicker in Live View (Anti-Flicker LV)
Reduce fl icker under fl uorescent lighting and the like. Choose this option if fl icker
makes the display diffi cult to view.
Auto The camera detects and reduces fl icker.
50Hz Reduce fl icker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating
current with a frequency of 50 Hz.
60Hz Reduce fl icker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating
current with a frequency of 60 Hz.
Off Flicker reduction off.
• This option is not available when [On] is selected for [Anti-Flicker Shooting]
(P. 185).
1
Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in G Custom Menu N
and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
Back Set
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority
jH Settings
On
Off
jL Settings
C-AF Release Priority
Flicker Reduction
2
Highlight [Anti-Flicker LV] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• [Anti-Flicker LV] options will be displayed.
Back Set
Flicker Reduction
Anti-Flicker Shooting
Auto
Off
Anti-Flicker LV
3
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• [Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.
Anti-Flicker LV
Auto
Automatically reduces flicker.
Back Set
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
185
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker Shooting)
You may notice uneven exposure in photos taken under fl ickering light. When this
option is enabled, the camera will detect the fl icker frequency and adjust the timing
of the shutter release accordingly. This feature applies to photos taken with the
mechanical shutter.
1
Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in G Custom Menu N
and press the Q button.
2
1
A1
A2
A3
A4
B
C1
C2
D1
Back Set
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority
jH Settings
On
Off
jL Settings
C-AF Release Priority
Flicker Reduction
2
Highlight [Anti-Flicker Shooting] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Anti-Flicker Shooting] options will be displayed.
Flicker Reduction
Anti-Flicker Shooting
Auto
Off
Anti-Flicker LV
Back Set
3
Highlight [On] or [Off] using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• [Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.
Anti-Flicker Shooting
On
Effects of flicker such as uneven
exposures and colors will be
reduced. The shutter release time
lag may become longer.
Valid when using mechanical shutter.
Back Set
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• A u icon appears in the display when [On] is selected. u icon
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
0.0
0
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
FLK
L
F
• This option does not take effect in modes that use the electronic shutter, including silent
modes, High Res Shot, and Pro Capture modes.
• The camera may be unable to detect fl icker at some settings. Normal release timing will
be used if fl icker is not detected.
• Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
• Enabling fl icker reduction may cause release lag, slowing the frame advance rate during
burst photography.
186
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Choosing the control panel displays (K Control Settings)
MENU G P [K Control Settings]
Sets whether or not to display control panels for option selection in each shooting
mode.
In each shooting mode, press the Q button to insert a check in the control panel you
want to display.
How to display control panels
• Press the Q button while the control panel is displayed, then press the INFO button to
switch the display.
• Only control panels selected in the [K Control Settings] menu will be displayed.
Change Color Saturation
B
Live Guide
(P. 49)
INFO
INFO
Live SCP
(P. 79)
Live Control
(P. 187)
INFO
INFO
L
F
4:3
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
S-IS AUTO
AUTOAUTO
UU
30p
30p
4K
WB Auto
Off
W Keep Warm Color o
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
250 F5.6
WB
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
F
INFO
INFO
Live SCP
(P. 79)
Live Control
(P. 187)
INFO
INFO
P/A/S/M/B
P
AUTOAUTO
UU
L
F
4:3
S-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
WB Auto
Off
W Keep Warm Color o
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250 F5.6
WB
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
INFO
Effect
Off
Pop Art 1
ART
1
ART
1
ART
Art Menu
(P. 55)
INFO
INFO
Live SCP
(P. 79)
Live Control
(P. 187)
INFO
INFO
UU
WB Auto
AUTOAUTO
Off
W Keep Warm Color o
L
F
4:3
S-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
1:02:03
sRGB
ART
1
S
-
AF
Effect Off
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
A
±
0
±
0.0
G
±
0
250 F5.6
WB
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
F
INFO
Portrait
SCN
Scene Menu
(P. 50)
INFO
INFO
Live SCP
(P. 79)
Live Control
(P. 187)
INFO
INFO
AUTOAUTO
UU
L
F
4:3
S-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
WB Auto
Off
W Keep Warm Color o
1:02:03
sRGB
Natural
S
-
AF
F
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0.0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
250 F5.6
WB
S-IS AUTO
1023
30p
30p
4K
M-IS
• For movie mode, set with [n Control Settings] of [n Display Settings] (P. 146).
187
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Live control
P
AUTOAUTO
UU
L
F
4:3
S-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
WB Auto
Off
W Keep Warm Color o
Settings
Functions
Available settings
Image stabilizer* ...................................P. 86
Picture mode* ...............................P. 98, 129
White balance* .....................................P. 83
Sequential shooting/Self-timer........P. 71, 87
Aspect ratio...........................................P. 87
KK (image quality)*
Still image .......................................P. 88
Movie ..............................................P. 89
n mode* ............................................P. 147
Flash mode ...........................................P. 95
Flash intensity control ...........................P. 97
Metering mode......................................P. 82
AF mode*..............................................P. 80
ISO sensitivity* ...............................P. 70, 80
Face priority* ........................................P. 67
Movie sound record*...........................P. 150
* Available in movie mode
• Some functions cannot be used depending on the shooting mode.
• When the controls in [KControl Settings] is set to [Live Control], you can use live control
even in B, P, A, S, M, B, ART, SCN modes (P. 166).
1
Press the Q button to display the live control.
• Press the Q button again to hide live control.
2
Use FG to move the cursor to the desired function, then use HI to select
it and press the Q button.
• The setting is confi rmed if you leave the camera as-is for 8 seconds.
188
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Adding information displays (G/Info Settings)
MENU G P [G/Info Settings]
q Info (Playback information displays)
Use [q Info] to add the following playback information displays. The added displays are
displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during playback. You can also choose to
not show displays that appear at the default setting.
15
Shadow Highlight
15
1615
1x
Histogram display Highlight & Shadow
display Light box display
Highlight & Shadow display
Areas above the upper limit of brightness for the image are shown in red, those below the
lower limit in blue. g [Histogram Settings] (P. 168)
Light box display
Compare two images side-by-side. Press the Q button to select the base image.
• The base image is displayed on the right. Use the front dial to select an image and press
the Q to move the image to the left. The image to be compared to the image on the left
can be selected on the right. To choose a different base image, highlight the right frame
and press the Q.
• To change the zoom ratio, turn the rear dial. Press the ISO button and then FGHI to
scroll the zoomed-in area, and rotate the front dial to select between images.
2x2x53 54
2x
ISO
ISO
ISO
ISO
ISO
ISO
qa Info (Magnifi ed playback information display)
The magnifi ed playback information displays can be set with [qa Info]. If [a] (Magnify)
is assigned to a button with Button Function (P. 107) in advance, the set displays can be
switched by repeatedly pressing the a button during playback. You can also choose to not
show displays that appear at the default setting.
aaa
a
2019.12.01 12:30:00
L
F
100-0020
20 20
2x2x2x
20
189
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
LV-Info (Shooting information displays)
To add highlights and shadows to the [LV-Info] display, press
I
on the arrow pad to place
a check next to [Custom1] or [Custom2].
The added displays are displayed by repeatedly
pressing the
INFO
button during shooting.
You can also choose to not show displays that
appear at the default setting.
G Settings (Index/calendar display)
You can change the number of frames to be displayed on the index display and set to not
display the screens that are set to be displayed by default with [G Settings]. Screens with a
check can be selected on the playback screen using the rear dial.
Q
Q
q
p
q
p
Index display
q
p
4 frames
202019.12.01 12:30:00
9, 25, or 100 frames
202019.12.01 12:30:00
202019.12.01 12:30:00
Single-frame
playback
2019.12.01 12:30:00
L
F
100-0020
20
Calendar display
7
141312111098
21201918
171615
28272625242322
21313029
31302928272625
61 2 3 4 5
2019.12
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri SatSun
Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio (qa Default Setting)
MENU G Q [qa Default Setting]
Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up playback).
Recently Zoom in to the most recently selected zoom ratio.
Equally Value Images are displayed at a zoom ratio of 1:1. A icon appears in the
monitor.
×2, ×3, ×5, ×7,
×10, ×14 Choose the starting zoom ratio.
190
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Selfi e Assist (Selfi e Assist)
MENU G R [Selfi e Assist]
When the monitor is in the selfi e position, you can display a convenient touch menu.
1
Select [On] for [Selfi e Assist] in Custom Menu R.
2
Turn the monitor towards you.
1:02:03
ISO-A
200
S-AF
1023
Self portrait menu
• The self portrait menu is displayed in the monitor.
AOne touch
e-Portrait Turning this on makes skin look smooth and translucent.
Valid only during AUTO mode (B).
CTouch shutter When the icon is tapped, the shutter is released about
1 second later.
DOne touch custom
self-timer
Shoot 3 frames using the self-timer. You can set the number
of times the shutter is released and the interval between
each release using [Custom Self-timer] (P. 71, 87).
3
Frame the shot.
• Be careful that your fi ngers or the camera
strap do not obstruct the lens.
4
Tap C to take the picture.
• The shot image will be displayed on the monitor.
• You can also shoot by tapping the subject displayed in the monitor, or by pressing the
shutter button.
191
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Viewing camera images on TV (HDMI)
MENU G S [HDMI]
Use the separately sold cable with the camera to playback recorded images on your
TV. This function is available during shooting. Connect the camera to an HD TV using
an HDMI cable to view high-quality images on a TV screen.
Type A
HDMI cable
(Connect to the HDMI connector
on the TV.)
HDMI connector (type D)
Connect the TV and camera and switch the input source of the TV.
• When an HDMI cable is connected, images are displayed on both the television and the
camera monitor. Information is displayed on the television screen only.
• For details on changing the input source of the TV, refer to the TV’s instruction manual.
• Depending on the TV’s settings, the displayed images and information may become
cropped.
• If the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video
signal type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV.
C4K C4K via HDMI output.
4K Priority is given to 4K HDMI output.
1080p Priority is given to 1080p HDMI output.
720p Priority is given to 720p HDMI output.
480p/576p 480p/576p HDMI output.
• Do not connect the camera to other HDMI output devices. Doing so may damage the
camera.
• HDMI output is disabled while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
• When [Record Mode] is selected for [Output Mode] (P. 146), movies will be output at the
resolution selected during recording. The images cannot be displayed on the connected
TV if the TV does not support the record mode.
• 1080p output will be used in place of [4K] or [C4K] while the camera is being used to take
photographs.
Using the TV remote control
The camera can be operated by a TV remote control when connected to a TV that
supports HDMI control. g [HDMI] (P. 168)
The camera monitor turns off.
• You can operate the camera by following the operation guide displayed on the TV.
• During single-frame playback, you can display or hide the information display by
pressing the “Red” button, and display or hide the index display by pressing the
“Green” button.
• Some televisions may not support all features.
192
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Live Bulb Update Frequency (Live Bulb)
MENU G U [Live Bulb]
Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live bulb photography
in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live bulb
photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in the display.
• [Live Bulb] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [BULB] or
[LIVE BULB] photography.
Live Time Update Frequency (Live Time)
MENU G U [Live Time]
Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live time photography
in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live time
photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in the display.
• [Live Time] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [TIME] or
[LIVE TIME] photography.
193
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Choosing the Shutter Speed (Composite Settings)
MENU G U [Composite Settings]
The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can be
chosen in advance using the menus.
1
Highlight [Composite Settings] in G Custom Menu
U and press the Q button.
2
1
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
G
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Bulb/Time Timer
Live Time
Off
-7
8min
0.5sec
Off
Live Bulb
Bulb/Time Monitor
KFlicker Scan
Composite Settings
Back Set
2
Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.
Composite Settings
1sec
Exposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.
Back Set
3
Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• G Custom Menu U will be displayed.
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• Live composite photography can continue for up to three hours.
• This item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode. See page P. 47 for more
information on composite photography.
• [Composite Settings] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button in
[LIVE COMP] mode.
194
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (K Flicker Scan)
MENU G U [K Flicker Scan]
Banding may occur in photographs taken under LED lighting. Use [K Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This item can be used in S, M, and silent mode and with High Res Shot and Pro
Capture shooting.
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.
1
Choose shooting and drive modes.
• Choose shooting mode S or M.
• Choose one of the following drive modes:
- Silent mode (♥o, ♥S, ♥T, ♥X, ♥Z, or ♥c)
- High Res Shot (h)
- Pro Capture (q or p)
2
Highlight [K Flicker Scan] in G Custom Menu U
and press the Q button.
2
1
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
G
Back Set
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Bulb/Time Timer
Live Time
Off
-7
8min
0.5sec
Off
Live Bulb
Bulb/Time Monitor
KFlicker Scan
Composite Settings
3
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.
• The camera will return to the previous menu.
2
1
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
G
Back Set
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Bulb/Time Timer
Live Time
Off
-7
8min
0.5sec
Off
Live Bulb
Bulb/Time Monitor
KFlicker Scan
Composite Settings
Off
On
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the
menus.
• The camera will exit to the shooting display. A P
icon
will be displayed.
250.0
SP
P icon
195
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
5
Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.
• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the FG buttons.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no longer visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the
P
icon will no longer
be displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using the
front or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the fl icker scan display.
6
Take pictures once settings have been adjusted to your satisfaction.
• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the fl icker
scan display. To view these items, fi rst press the INFO button to exit the fl icker scan
display.
%
• [K Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable fl icker scan. g [K Button Function] (P. 107)
Shutter speeds when the fl ash fi res (#X-Sync./#Slow Limit)
MENU G W [#X-Sync.]/[#Slow Limit]
You can set shutter speed conditions for when the fl ash fi res.
Shooting
mode Flash fi ring shutter speed Upper limit Lower limit
PThe camera automatically sets the
shutter speed. [#X-Sync.]
setting
[#Slow Limit]
setting*
A
SThe set shutter speed No lower limit
M
* Extends up to 60 seconds when slow synchronization is set.
196
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Combinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates
(K Set)
MENU G X [K Set]
You can set the JPEG image quality by combining image size and compression rate.
Image size Compression rate
Application
Name Pixel Count SF
(Super Fine) F
(Fine) N
(Normal)
Y (Large) 5184×3888* YSF* YF* YN* Select for the print
size
X (Middle) 3200×2400* XSF XFXN*
1920×1440
W (Small) 1280×960 WSF WFWNFor small prints and
use on a website
1024×768
* Default
Saving lens info (Lens Info Settings)
MENU G Y [Lens Info Settings]
The camera can store information for up to 10 lenses that do not conform to the Micro
Four Thirds or Four Thirds system standards. These data also supply the focal length
used for the image stabilization and keystone compensation features.
1
Select [Create Lens Information] for [Lens Info Settings] in Custom Menu Y.
2
Select [Lens Name] and enter a lens name. After entering a name, highlight
[END] and press the Q button.
3
Use FGHI to choose the [Focal Length].
4
Use FGHI to choose the [Aperture Value].
5
Select [Set] and press the Q button.
• The lens will be added to the lens info menu.
• When a lens that does not supply info automatically is attached, the info used is indicated
by v. Highlight a lens with a v icon and press the Q button.
%
• [Lens Info Settings] can be assigned to a button. The button can then be used to recall
lens info, for example after lenses are exchanged. g [Button Function] (P. 107)
197
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Selecting the display style of the viewfi nder (EVF Style)
MENU G a [EVF Style]
Style 1/2: Similar to fi lm camera viewfi nder displays.
Style 3: The same as the monitor display.
250 F5.6 0.00.0 WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
1:02:03
1023
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
ISO-A
200
S-AF
250 F5.6 0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
L
F
Style 1/ Style 2 Style 3
Viewfi nder display when shooting using the viewfi nder
(Style 1/Style 2)
AEL
C
250 F5.6 +2.0+2.0 Hi +7
Mid+2
Sh
-
3
Hi +7
Mid+2
Sh
-
3
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
1:02:03
1023
AEL
C
250 F5.6 +2.0+2.0 Hi +7
Mid+2
Sh
-
3
Hi +7
Mid+2
Sh
-
3
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
1:02:03
1023
AEL
C
250 F5.6 +2.0+2.0 Hi +7
Mid+2
Sh
-
3
Hi +7
Mid+2
Sh
-
3
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
ISO-A
200
ISO-A
200
1:02:03
1023
34215
69870abcde
f
g
1 Battery check
j: Ready for use.
k: Low battery
l: Battery is running low.
m: Charging required.
2 z ..................................................P. 108
3 Shooting mode.........................P. 34 –59
4 Assign to Custom Mode..........P. 57, 128
5 Available recording time ...............P. 242
6 Number of storable still pictures ...P. 241
7 ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 70, 80
8 White balance .................................P. 83
9
Highlight&Shadow Control
............P. 106
0 Top: Flash intensity control .............P. 97
Bottom: Exposure compensation
indicator ..........................................P. 64
a Exposure compensation value........P. 64
b Aperture value ........................ P. 37 – 43
c Shutter speed ..........................P. 37 – 43
d AE Lock u ...........................P. 70, 175
e AF confi rmation mark......................P. 35
f Flash (blinks: charging in progress)
........................................................P. 93
g Level gauge (displayed by pressing the
shutter button down halfway)
198
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Correcting Fisheye Distortion (Fisheye Compensation)
MENU G b [Fisheye Compensation]
Correct distortion caused by fi sheye lenses to give photos the appearance of pictures
taken with a wide-angle lens. The amount of correction can be selected from three
different levels. You can also opt simultaneously to correct distortion in photos taken
under water.
• This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.
• This option is only available with compatible fi sheye lenses.
As of July 2019, it could be used with the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye PRO.
Angle When fi sheye correction is performed, the picture is cropped to
eliminate blacked-out areas. Choose from three different crops.
j/i Correction Choose whether to correct distortion in photos taken under water in
addition to the correction performed using [Angle].
1
Highlight [Fisheye Compensation] in G Custom
Menu b and press the Q button.
2
1
H1
H2
I
J1
J2
Back Set
J1. KUtility
Pixel Mapping
Touchscreen Settings On
Recall
Off
Level Adjust
Press-and-hold Time
Fisheye Compensation
Menu Recall
2
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
• [Angle] and [j/i Correction] will be displayed.
2
1
H1
H2
I
J1
J2
J1. KUtility
Pixel Mapping
Touchscreen Settings On
Recall
Off
Level Adjust
Press-and-hold Time
Fisheye Compensation
Menu Recall
Back Set
Off
On
3
Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press
the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• If you are not taking photos under water, choose [Off]
for [j/i Correction].
• [Fisheye Compensation] options will be displayed.
Fisheye Compensation
Angle 1
j/i Correction Off
Back Set
4
Press the Q button repeatedly to exit to the custom menu.
• After confi rming that [On] is selected for [Fisheye Compensation], press the MENU
button to exit the menus.
• When fi sheye compensation is enabled, a A icon will
be displayed together with the selected crop.
Fisheye compensation
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
S-AF
0.0
0
30p
30p
4K
1
L
F
199
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
5
Take pictures.
• Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Fisheye compensation is not applied to the RAW image.
• Focus peaking is not available in the fi sheye compensation display.
• AF-target selection is restricted to single- and small-target modes.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,
keystone compensation, the digital teleconverter, movie recording,
[C-AF] and
[C-AF+TR]
AF modes, [e
-Portrait
] and art fi lter picture modes, the custom self-timer,
and High Res Shot.
%
• [Fisheye Compensation] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button
to enable fi sheye correction. g [K Button Function] (P. 107)
200
EN
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
5
5
Use the camera’s wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and Bluetooth® features to connect to a
smartphone, where you can use the dedicated app to enhancement your enjoyment of
the camera both before and after shooting. Once a connection has been established,
you can download and take pictures remotely and add GPS tags to the images on the
camera.
• Operation is not guaranteed on all smartphones.
Things you can do with the specifi ed app, OLYMPUS Image Share (OI.Share)
• Download images from the camera to the smartphone
You can load images in the camera to a smartphone.
You can also use the smartphone to select images for download from the camera.
• Remote shooting from a smartphone
You can remotely operate the camera and shoot using a smartphone.
For details, visit the address below:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oishare/
Things you can do with the specifi ed app, Olympus Image Palette (OI.Palette)
• Beautiful image processing
Use intuitive controls to apply impressive effects to images downloaded to your
smartphone.
For details, visit the address below:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oipalette/
Things you can do with the specifi ed app, OLYMPUS Image Track (OI.Track)
• Addition of GPS tags to camera images
You can add GPS tags to images simply by transferring the GPS log saved on the
smartphone to the camera.
For details, visit the address below:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oitrack/
• Before using the wireless LAN function, read “Using the wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions” (P. 249).
• Olympus accepts no responsibility for violations of local regulations governing wireless
communications caused by the use of the camera’s wireless LAN/Bluetooth® features
outside the country or region of purchase.
• As with any wireless communication, there is always a risk of interception by a third party.
Keep this mind when using wireless LAN.
• The wireless LAN function on the camera cannot be used to connect to a home or public
access point.
• The transceiver antenna is located inside the grip. Keep the antenna away from metal
objects whenever possible.
• Depending on the composition of the container or the objects it contains, the camera may
be unable to connect to a smartphone when placed inside a bag or other container.
• During wireless LAN connection, the battery will run down faster. If the battery is running
low, the connection may be lost during a transfer.
• Connection may be diffi cult or slow in proximity to devices that generate magnetic fi elds,
static electricity or radio waves, such as near microwaves, cordless telephone.
• Wireless LAN cannot be used when the memory card write-protect switch is in the “LOCK”
position.
Connecting the camera to a
smartphone
201
EN
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
5
Adjusting Settings for Connection to a Smartphone
Start the OI.Share App installed on your smartphone.
1
Select [Device Connection] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q
button.
• You can also connect by tapping G in the monitor.
2
Follow the on-screen guide to adjust Wi-Fi/Bluetooth settings.
• The Bluetooth local name and passcode, the Wi-Fi SSID and password, and a QR
code are displayed in the monitor.
Connection Setup
Scan the QR code, using
the Olympus Image Share
app.
Disconnect
Bluetooth Name
Bluetooth Passcode
Wi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi Password
: xxxxxxxxxxx
: 000000
: xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx
: 00000000
3/3
QR code
Wi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi Password
Bluetooth local name
Bluetooth Passcode
3
Tap the camera icon at the bottom of the OI.Share display.
• An [Easy Setup] tab will be displayed.
4
Follow the on-screen instructions in OI.Share to scan the QR code and adjust
connection settings.
• If you are unable to scan the QR code, follow the on-screen instructions in OI.Share
to adjust settings manually.
- Bluetooth: To connect, select the local name and enter the passcode displayed in
the camera monitor into the Bluetooth settings dialog in OI.Share.
- Wi-Fi: Enter the SSID and password displayed by the camera into the Wi-Fi
settings dialog displayed by OI.Share.
• w1 will be displayed when a connection is established.
5
To end the connection, press MENU on the camera or tap [Disconnect] on
the monitor screen.
• You can also turn the camera off and end the connection from OI.Share.
202
EN
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
5
Wireless Settings for When the Camera Is Off
You can choose whether the camera will maintain a wireless connection to the
smartphone when off.
1
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the d setup menu and press the Q
button.
2
Highlight [Power-off Standby] and press I.
3
Highlight the desired option and press the Q button.
Select When you turn the camera off, you will be prompted to choose whether to
maintain the wireless connection to the smartphone.
Off Turning the camera off terminates the wireless connection to the smartphone.
On When the camera is turned off, the connection to the smartphone remains
active and the smartphone can still be used to download or view the pictures
on the camera.
“Select”
When [Select] is chosen for [Power-off Standby], a
confi rmation dialog will be displayed before the camera
turns off if all the following conditions are met:
• [On] is selected for [Availability]
• The camera is currently connected with a smartphone
(P. 201)
• The memory card is correctly inserted
Power-off Standby
Activate Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Power-off
Standby so images can be imported
while power is off?
Yes
No
Set
Yes
Turn the camera off but leave the wireless smartphone connection active.
No
Turn the camera off and terminate the wireless smartphone connection.
• If no operations are performed about a minute after the confi rmation dialog is displayed,
the camera will end the wireless connection to the smartphone and turn off automatically.
$
• If left active, the wireless connection will automatically terminate if:
- the connection remains inactive for 12 hours
- the memory card is removed
- the battery is replaced
- a charging error occurs during on-board battery charging
The connection can be restored by turning the camera on.
• Note that if [On] is selected for [Power-off Standby], camera may not turn on immediately
when the ON/OFF lever is rotated to ON.
203
EN
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
5
Transferring images to a smartphone
You can select images in the camera and load them to a smartphone. You can also use
the camera to select images you want to share in advance. g “Selecting Pictures for
Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 119)
1
Start [Device Connection] on the camera (P. 201).
• You can also connect by tapping G in the monitor.
• Once confi gured for connection, the camera will connect
automatically.
• w1 will be displayed when a connection is established.
ISO-A
200
1:02:03
250 F5.6
S-AF
1023
2
Launch OI.Share and tap the Image Transfer button.
• The images in the camera are displayed in a list.
3
Select the pictures you want to transfer and tap the Save button.
• When saving is completed, you can turn off the camera from the smartphone.
$
• If the following options are selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth settings] in the camera d (setup)
menu, you can download pictures to the smartphone as described in Steps 2 and 3,
above, even when the camera is off:
- [Availability]: [On]
- [Power-off standby]: [On]
204
EN
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
5
Automatically uploading images while the camera is off
To confi gure the camera to automatically upload images to a smartphone while off:
• Mark images for sharing (P. 119)
• Enable power-off standby (P. 202)
• If you are using an iOS device, launch OI.Share
$
• Auto upload is not available if you are connected via a router (for example, a home
network), in which case you will need to transfer pictures using OI.Share.
• Some smartphones may terminate upload on entering sleep mode. Keep the smartphone
awake while upload is in progress.
Shooting remotely with a smartphone
You can shoot remotely by operating the camera with a smartphone.
1
Start [Device Connection] on the camera.
• You can also connect by tapping G in the monitor.
2
Launch OI.Share and tap the Remote button.
3
Tap the shutter button to shoot.
• The image taken is saved on the memory card in the camera.
• Available shooting options are partially limited.
205
EN
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
5
Adding position information to images
You can add GPS tags to images that were taken while the GPS log was saving by
transferring the GPS log saved on the smartphone to the camera.
1
Before taking pictures with the camera, launch OI.Track on the smartphone to
begin saving the GPS log.
• Before starting a GPS track log, you will need to connect once via OI.Track and
synchronize the clock.
• You can use the phone or other apps while the GPS log is saving. Do not terminate
OI.Track.
2
Once you have fi nished taking pictures with the camera, end tracking in
OI.Share.
3
Tap the G icon in the camera monitor to connect to the smartphone.
• You can also connect by selecting [Device Connection] in the q playback menu.
4
Upload the GPS log to the camera using OI.Track.
• The GPS log will be used to add location data to any pictures taken after you
launched OI.Track in Step 1.
• g is displayed on images to which position information has been added.
• Addition of location information can only be used with smartphones that have a GPS
function.
• Position information cannot be added to movies.
206
EN
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
5
Resetting Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® settings
To restore [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] to default values:
1
Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q
button.
2
Select [Reset Settings] and press I.
3
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The following settings will be reset:
Option Default
Availability On
Connection Password ― (generated randomly) *
Power-off Standby Off *
* The connection to the smartphone will also be reset (deactivated).
Changing the password
To change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth passwords:
1
Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q
button.
2
Select [Connection Password] and press I.
3
Follow the operation guide and press the R button.
• A new password will be set.
• Both the Wi-Fi connection password and Bluetooth connection passcode can be
changed.
• Reconnect to the smartphone after changing passwords. g “Adjusting Settings for
Connection to a Smartphone” (P. 201)
207
EN
Connecting the camera to a smartphone
5
Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® 
To disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth®:
1
Select [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the d Setup Menu and press the Q
button.
2
Select [Availability] and press I.
3
Select [Off] and press the Q button.
$
• To disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® only while the camera is off, select [Off] for [Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-off Standby]. g “Wireless Settings for When the Camera
Is Off” (P. 202)
208
EN
Connecting the camera to a computer
6
6
Connecting the camera to a computer
Micro-USB connector
Smaller terminal
USB port USB cable
• If nothing is displayed on the camera screen even after connecting the camera to the
computer, the battery may be exhausted. Use a full-charged battery.
• The camera should prompt you to choose a host when turned on. If it does not, select
[Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 168) in the camera custom menus.
Copying pictures to a computer
The following operating systems are compatible with the USB connection:
Windows: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10
Mac: OS X versions 10.9 – 10.11, macOS versions v10.12 – v10.14
1
Turn the camera off and connect it to the computer.
• The location of the USB port varies with the computer. For details, refer to your
computer’s manual.
2
Turn the camera on.
• The selection screen for the USB connection is displayed.
3
Press FG to select [Storage]. Press the Q
button.
USB
Storage
MTP
PCM Recorder
Exit
Set
4
The computer recognizes the camera as a new device.
Connecting the camera to a computer
209
EN
Connecting the camera to a computer
6
• Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computer is
equipped with a USB port.
Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc., computers
without a factory-installed OS, or home-built computers
• Camera controls cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer.
• If the dialog shown in Step 3 is not displayed when the camera is connected to a
computer, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 168) in the camera custom menus.
Installing the PC software
Install the following software to access the camera while it is connected directly to the
computer via USB.
Olympus Workspace
This computer application is used to download, view, and manage photos and movies
recorded with the camera. It can also be used to update the camera fi rmware. The software
can be downloaded from the website below. Be prepared to provide the camera serial
number when downloading the software.
https://support.olympus-imaging.com/owdownload/
210
EN
Cautions
7
7
Battery and charger
• The camera uses a single Olympus lithium-ion battery. Never use any battery other than
genuine OLYMPUS batteries.
• The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions.
• As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained
quickly.
• Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shooting
mode.
• Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period.
• When connected to a computer.
• Leaving wireless LAN/Bluetooth® enabled.
• When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning
being displayed.
• The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery using the
provided charger before use.
• Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or
more. Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives,
potentially rendering them unusable.
• The normal charging time using the supplied charger is approximately 3 hours and
30 minutes (estimated).
• Do not attempt to use chargers not specifi cally designated for use with the supplied
battery, or to use batteries not specifi cally designated for use with the supplied charger.
• There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “CAUTION” (P. 248) in the
instruction manual.
Cautions
211
EN
Cautions
7
Using your charger abroad
• The charger can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to
240 V AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you
are in, the AC wall outlet may be shaped differently and the charger may require a plug
adapter to match the wall outlet.
• Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the charger may malfunction.
Usable cards
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards”. The
following types of SD memory card (commercially available) can
be used with this camera: SD, SDHC, and SDXC. For the latest
information, please visit the Olympus website.
SD card write protect switch
The SD card body has a write protect switch. Setting the switch to
“LOCK” prevents data being written to the card. Return the switch to
the unlock position enable writing.
LOCK
• The data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card or
deleting the data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal
information.
• Access to some playback functions and the like may be restricted when the write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
212
EN
Cautions
7
Interchangeable lenses
Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use
lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system and
bearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown at right.
With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System and OM System
lenses. The optional adapter is required.
• When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mount
on the camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter from
getting inside the camera.
• Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places.
• Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera
to malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through the
lens.
• Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached.
Lens and camera combinations
Lens Camera Attachment AF Metering
Micro Four Thirds system
lens Micro Four Thirds
system camera
Yes Yes Yes
Four Thirds system lens Attachment possible
with mount adapter
Yes*1Yes
OM System lenses No Yes*2
*1 AF is not operational when recording movies.
*2 Accurate metering is not possible.
213
EN
Cautions
7
MF Clutch Lenses
The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used to
switch between auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
• Check the position of the MF clutch before shooting.
• Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, while
sliding it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless of
the focus mode chosen with the camera.
Focus distances visible
2153mm
∞
0.5
5.6 8 11 16
5.681116
2153mm
∞
0.5
5.6 8 11 16
5.681116
Focus ring
AF/MF MFAF/MF MF
• Selecting [MF] or [PreMF] for focus mode on the camera disables autofocus even when
the focus ring is in the AF/MF position.
214
EN
Cautions
7
Optional Accessories
Grip (ECG-5)
The grip helps you keep the camera steady when using large lenses.
Make sure to turn the camera off when attaching and removing the grip.
Part names
Shutter button
Front dial
Removal knob
Connector cap
Attaching the Grip
Before attaching the grip, remove the
connector cover (a) from the bottom of the
camera and the connector cap (b) from
the ECG-5. Once attached, make sure the
ECG-5 removal knob is tightly secured. Be
sure to replace the connector cover on the
camera when the ECG-5 is not in use.
a
a
b
Store the connector cover (a) in the ECG-5
Main Specifi cations (ECG-5)
Dimensions Approx. 128.4 mm (W) × 76 mm (H) × 60.2 mm (D)
(5.1" × 3.0" × 2.4")
Weight Approx. 121 g (4.3 oz.) (excluding battery and terminal cap)
Splash resistance
(when attached to camera) Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1
• Do not use your nail to turn the removal knob. Doing so could result in injury.
• Only use the camera within the guaranteed operating temperature range.
• Do not use or store the product in dusty or humid areas.
• Do not touch the electrical contacts.
• Use a dry, soft cloth to clean the terminals. Do not clean the product with a damp cloth,
thinner, benzine, or any other organic solvents.
215
EN
Cautions
7
Designated External Flash Units
When using a fl ash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose the fl ash
mode using camera controls and take pictures with the fl ash. See the documentation
provided with the fl ash unit for information on fl ash features and their use.
Choose a fl ash unit to suit your needs, taking into consideration such factors as
the output required and whether the unit supports macro photography. Flash units
designed to communicate with the camera support a variety of fl ash modes, including
TTL auto and super FP. Flash units can be mounted on the camera hot shoe or
connected using a cable (available separately) and fl ash bracket. The camera also
supports the following wireless fl ash control systems:
Radio-Controlled Flash Photography: CMD, #CMD, RCV, and X-RCV Modes
The camera controls one or more remote fl ash units by means of radio signals. The
range of locations in which fl ash units can be placed increases. Flash units can control
other compatible units or be fi tted with radio commander/receivers to allow the use of
units that do not otherwise support radio fl ash control.
Wireless Remote-Control Flash Photography: RC Mode
The camera controls one or more remote fl ash units by means of optical signals. The
fl ash mode can be selected using camera controls (P. 97).
Features Available with Compatible Flash Units
Flash unit Supported fl ash control
modes GN (Guide Number,
ISO 100) Supported wireless
systems
FL-700WR
TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,
FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL MANUAL
GN 42 (75/150 mm *1)
GN 21 (12/24 mm *1)CMD, #CMD, RCV,
X-RCV, RC
FL-900R TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL AUTO, SL MANUAL
GN 58 (100/200 mm *1)
GN 27 (12/24 mm *1)RC
FL-600R GN 36 (42.5/85 mm *1)
GN 20 (12/24 mm *1)RC
STF-8 TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,
RC *2GN 8.5 RC *2
*1 Maximum lens focal length at which unit can provide fl ash coverage (fi gures following
slashes are 35 mm format equivalent focal lengths).
*2 Functions as commander (transmitter) only.
216
EN
Cautions
7
Wireless remote control fl ash photography
Wireless fl ash photography is available with compatible fl ash units that support
wireless remote control (RC). The remote fl ash units are controlled via a unit mounted
on the camera hot shoe. Settings can be adjusted separately for the camera-mounted
unit and units in up to three other groups.
RC mode must be enabled on both the master and remote fl ash units.
Enabling RC Mode
1
Set the remote fl ash units to RC mode and place them as desired.
• Turn the external fl ash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode.
• Select a channel and group for each external fl ash unit.
2
Select [On] for [#RC Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 127), and press the
Q button.
• The camera will exit to the shooting display.
• An q icon will be displayed. q icon
P
S-IS AUTO
1:02:03
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
0.0
0
S-AF
1023
30p
30p
4K
RC
L
F
3
Press the Q button.
• The RC mode super control panel will be displayed.
• The standard LV super control panel can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button. The display will change
each time the INFO button is pressed.
A Mode
TTL
Manual
Off
+5.0
TTL +3.0
1/8
–
LO
1Ch
P
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
RC mode super control panel
217
EN
Cautions
7
4
Adjust fl ash settings.
• Highlight items using the FGHI buttons and rotate the rear dial to choose
settings.
Flash compensation
A Mode
TTL
Manual
Off
+5.0
TTL +3.0
1/8
–
LO
1Ch
P
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
Group
Flash mode
Optical signal strength
Channel
Flash control mode
Group Choose a group. Changes to settings apply to all units in
the selected group. Choose Q to adjust settings for the unit
mounted on the camera.
Flash control mode Choose a fl ash mode.
Flash compensation Adjust fl ash output. When [Manual] is selected for fl ash mode,
you can a value for manual fl ash output.
Optical signal
strength
Choose the brightness of the optical control signals emitted by
the fl ash units. Choose [HI] if you have placed fl ash units at
close to the maximum distance from the camera. This setting
applies to all groups.
Flash mode/
fl ash level
Choose # (standard) or FP (super FP). Choose super FP for
shutter speeds faster than the fl ash sync speed. This setting
applies to all groups.
Channel Choose the channel used for fl ash control. Change the
channel if you fi nd that other light sources in the area are
interfering with remote fl ash control.
5
Set the unit mounted on the camera to [TTL AUTO].
• Flash control settings for the FL-LM3 can only be adjusted using the camera.
Positioning Remote Flash Units
1
Set the wireless RC fl ash units to RC mode.
• After turning compatible fl ash units on, press the MODE button and choose RC
mode.
• Choose a group for each of the compatible fl ash units using fl ash controls and match
the channel to that selected with the camera.
2
Position the fl ash units.
• Position the wireless units with the remote sensors facing the camera.
3
Take pictures after confi rming that the remote units and the unit on the
camera are charged.
218
EN
Cautions
7
Wireless Flash Control Range
The illustration is intended as a guide only. The fl ash control range varies with the type
of fl ash mounted on the camera and the conditions in the surrounding area.
Flash Control Range for Camera-Mounted FL-LM3 Flash Units
7m
5m
100°100°
50°
50° 50°
50°
60°
60°
30°
30°
30°
30°
• We recommend that each group contain no more than 3 fl ash units.
• Wireless fl ash photography is not available in anti-shock mode or in rear-curtain slow sync
mode when a shutter speed slower than 4 s is selected.
• Start wait times longer than 4 s cannot be selected in anti-shock and silent modes.
• Flash control signals may interfere with exposure if subject is too close to the camera.
This can be mitigated by reducing the brightness of the camera fl ash, for example by
using a diffuser.
Other external fl ash units
Note the following when using a third-party fl ash unit mounted on the camera hot shoe:
• Using obsolete fl ash units that apply currents of more than about 24 V to the X-contact will
damage the camera.
• Connecting fl ash units with signal contacts that do not conform to Olympus specifi cations
may damage the camera.
• Set the Shooting mode to M, set the shutter speed to a value no higher than fl ash
synchronous speed, and set ISO sensitivity to a setting other than [AUTO].
• Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the fl ash to the ISO sensitivity
and aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted by
adjusting either ISO sensitivity or aperture.
• Use a fl ash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually
expressed using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths.
219
EN
Cautions
7
Principal Accessories
Remote cable (RM-CB2)
Use when the slightest camera movement can result in blurred pictures, for example
for macro or bulb photography. Connect the cable to the camera remote cable terminal
(P. 14).
Converter lenses
Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fi sh-eye or macro
photography. See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can be
used.
Eyecup (EP-16)
You can switch to a large-size eyecup.
Removal
1
2
220
EN
Cautions
7
System chart
Viewfinder
EP-16
Eyecup
Power Supply
BCS-5
Lithium-ion Charger
BLS-50
Lithium-ion battery F-5AC
USB-AC Adapter
ECG-5
Grip
Software
Olympus Workspace
Digital Photo Managing Software
SD/SDHC/
SDXC
Memory Card
Connection
Cable USB Cable /
HDMI Cable *1
Case / Strap Shoulder Strap /
Camera Case
Microphone
Grip
RM-CB2
Remote Cable
Remote
Operation
: E-M5 Mark 3 compatible products
: Commercially available products
For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.
*1 HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers.
*2 There are restrictions on the lenses that can be used with the adapter. Visit the OLYMPUS website for
details.
*3 Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on compatible lenses.
221
EN
Cautions
7
Lens
MMF-2/MMF-3*2
Four Thirds Adapter
Four Thirds system
lenses
Micro Four Thirds system lenses
Converter
Lens*3
FCON-P01
Fisheye
WCON-P01
Wide
MCON-P01
Macro
MCON-P02
Macro
Flash
FL-900R
Electronic Flash
FL-LM3
Electronic Flash FL-700WR
Electronic Flash
FC-WR
Wireless radiowave
commander
STF-8
Macro Flash FR-WR
Wireless radiowave receiver
222
EN
Information
8
8 Information
Cleaning and storing the camera
Cleaning the camera
Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera.
• Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth.
Exterior:
• Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water
and wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you
have used the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung.
Monitor:
• Wipe gently with a soft cloth.
Lens:
• Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently with
a lens cleaning paper.
Storage
• When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Store
the camera in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated.
• Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions.
• Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached. Be sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away.
• Clean the camera after use.
• Do not store with insect repellent.
• Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect the
camera from corrosion.
• Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty.
• Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before
taking important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works
properly.
223
EN
Information
8
Cleaning and checking the image pickup device
This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on the
image pickup device and to remove any dust or dirt from the image pickup device
surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction function operates when the
camera is turned on.
The dust reduction function operates at the same time as the pixel mapping, which
checks the image pickup device and image processing circuitry. Since dust reduction
is activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held
upright for the dust reduction function to be effective.
Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions
The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup
device and image processing functions. After using the monitor or taking continuous
shots, wait for at least one minute before using the pixel mapping function to ensure
that it operates correctly.
1
In Custom Menu b, select [Pixel Mapping] (P. 174).
2
Press I, then press the Q button.
• The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping
is fi nished, the menu is restored.
• If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1.
224
EN
Information
8
Shooting tips and information
The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded
The battery is not fully charged
• Charge the battery with the charger.
The battery is temporarily unable to function because of the cold
• Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it by
putting it in your pocket for a while.
No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed
The camera has turned off automatically
• If power saving is enabled, the camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are
performed for a set period. Press the shutter button halfway to exit the sleep mode.
• The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if no
operations are performed for a set period of time. g [Sleep] (P. 174)
If no operations are performed for a set time after the camera has entered sleep mode,
the camera will turn off automatically. g [Auto Power Off] (P. 174)
The fl ash is charging
• On the monitor, the # mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking to
stop, then press the shutter button.
Unable to focus
• The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are not
suited to autofocus (the AF confi rmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase the
distance to the subject or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from the
camera as your main subject, compose the shot, and shoot.
Subjects that are diffi cult to focus on
It may be diffi cult to focus with auto focus in the following situations.
AF confi rmation
mark is blinking.
These subjects
are not focused.
Subject with low
contrast Excessively bright
light in center of frame
AF confi rmation
mark lights up but
the subject is not
focused.
Subjects at different
distances Fast-moving subject Subject not inside
AF area
225
EN
Information
8
Noise reduction is activated
• When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear in
images. The camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter
speeds. During which, shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduct.] to [Off].
g [Noise Reduct.] (P. 169)
The number of AF targets is reduced
The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter]
(P. 130), [Image Aspect] (P. 87), and group target (P. 65) settings.
The date and time has not been set
The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase
• The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before
using the camera. g “Initial setup” (P. 27)
The battery has been removed from the camera
• The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera is
left without the battery for approximately 1 day. The settings will be canceled more quickly
if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time before being removed. Before
taking important pictures, check that the date and time settings are correct.
Set functions are restored to their factory default settings
Options selected in AUTO (B) or SCN mode are reset when the mode dial is rotated to
another setting or the camera is turned off. In addition, selecting C mode restores custom
mode settings.
Image taken appears whitish
This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This is
due to a phenomenon called fl are or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition
where strong light source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a light
source is not present in the picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the light
source. If a lens hood does not have effect, use your hand to shade the lens from the light.
g “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 212)
Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken
This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image pickup device. Perform [Pixel Mapping].
If the problem persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking the
image processing functions” (P. 223)
Functions that cannot be selected from menus
Some items may not be selectable from the menus when using the arrow pad.
• Items that cannot be set with the current shooting mode.
• Items that cannot be set because of an item that has already been set:
Combinations of [T] (P. 71) and [Noise Reduct.] (P. 169), etc.
226
EN
Information
8
The subject appears distorted
The following functions use an electronic shutter:
movie recording (P. 58), silent mode (P. 74), Pro Capture shooting (P. 74), High Res
Shot (P. 76), focus bracketing (P. 134), focus stacking (P. 134)
This may cause distortion if the subject is moving rapidly or the camera is moved abruptly.
Avoid moving the camera abruptly during shooting or use standard sequential shooting.
Lines appear in photographs
The following functions use an electronic shutter, which may result in lines due to fl icker and
other phenomena associated with fl uorescent and LED lighting, an effect that can sometimes
be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds:
movie recording (P. 58), silent mode (P. 74), Pro Capture shooting (P. 74), High Res
Shot (P. 76), focus bracketing (P. 134), focus stacking (P. 134)
Flicker can be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds. You can also reduce fl icker using
fl icker scan. g [K Flicker Scan] (P. 194), [n Flicker Scan] (P. 148)
227
EN
Information
8
Error codes
Monitor indication Possible cause Corrective action
No Card
The card is not inserted, or it
cannot be recognized. Insert a card. Or reinsert the
card properly.
Card Error
There is a problem with the
card.
Insert the card again. If the
problem persists, format the
card.
If the card cannot be formatted,
it cannot be used.
Write Protect
Writing to the card is
prohibited.
The card write-protect switch is
set to the “LOCK” side. Release
the switch (P. 211).
Card Full
The card is full. No more
pictures can be taken or no
more information such as print
reservation can be recorded.
Replace the card or erase
unwanted pictures.
Before erasing, download
important images to a PC.
There is no space in the card
and print reservation or new
images cannot be recorded.
No Picture
There are no pictures on the
card. The card contains no pictures.
Record pictures and play back.
Picture Error
The selected picture cannot be
displayed for playback due to
a problem with this picture. Or
the picture cannot be used for
playback on this camera.
Use image processing software
to view the picture on a PC.
If that cannot be done, the
image fi le is damaged.
The Image Cannot Be
Edited
Pictures taken with another
camera cannot be edited on
this camera.
Use image processing software
to edit the picture.
Y/M/D The clock is not set. Set the clock (P. 27).
228
EN
Information
8
Monitor indication Possible cause Corrective action
m
The internal temperature of
the camera has risen due to
sequential shooting.
Turn off the camera and wait for
the internal temperature to cool.
Internal camera
temperature is too high.
Please wait for cooling
before camera use.
Wait a moment for the camera
to turn off automatically.
Allow the internal temperature
of the camera to cool before
resuming operations.
Battery Empty The battery is drained. Charge the battery.
No Connection
The camera is not correctly
connected to a computer,
HDMI display, or other device. Reconnect the camera.
The lens is locked.
Please extend the lens. The lens of the retractable lens
stays retracted. Extend the lens.
Please check the status
of a lens.
An abnormality has occurred
between the camera and the
lens.
Turn off the camera, check the
connection with the lens, and
turn the power on again.
229
EN
Information
8
Default Settings
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].
Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel
Shooting
mode Item Default *1 *2 *3 g
P/A/S/M/BISO Auto  80
Flash Mode # 94
x±0  97
Manual Value #FULL (fl ash set to
[#MANUAL])
 95
K Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO  86
WB Auto ([On] selected for
[W Keep Warm Color])
 83
WB compensation A ±0 ―85
WB compensation G ±0 ―
Kelvin 5400K ([CWB] selected for
[WB])
―83
AF Area Center/single  65
K AF Mode S-AF  80
IFace Priority Face & Eye Priority On ―67
j/Yo 87
Metering p 82
KKYF (High Res Shot:
IF+RAW)
 88
nK 89
Picture Mode Natural  98
Sharpness ±0 ―101
Contrast ±0 ―101
Saturation ±0 ―101
Gradation Gradation Normal ―102
Effect ―
([i-Enhance] selected for
[Picture Mode]: 3Standard)
―104
Color Filter ―
([Monochrome] selected for
[Picture Mode]: N:None)
 103
Monochrome Color ―
([Monochrome] selected for
[Picture Mode]: N:Normal)
 104
Aspect 4:3  87
Color Space sRGB  105
Highlight&Shadow
Control f (±0)  106
Movie ROn  150
230
EN
Information
8
Shooting
mode Item Default *1 *2 *3 g
n (movie) ISO [P], [A], or [S] selected for
[n Mode]: Auto (fi xed)
[M] selected for [n Mode]:
200
 80
Flash Mode Flash Off (fi xed) ――― ―
x±0 (fi xed) ――― ―
n Image Stabilizer M-IS1 86
WB Auto ([On] selected for
[W Keep Warm Color])
 83
WB compensation A ±0 ―85
WB compensation G ±0 ―
Kelvin 5400K ([CWB] selected for
[WB])
―83
AF Area Center; Small Target  65
n AF Mode C-AF  80
IFace Priority Face & Eye Priority On ―67
Metering p (fi xed) ――― ―
nK 89
Picture Mode Natural  98
Sharpness ±0 ―101
Contrast ±0 ―101
Saturation ±0 ―101
Gradation Gradation Normal ―102
Aspect 16:9 (fi xed)
C4K selected for [nK]:
17:9
――― ―
Color Space sRGB (fi xed) ――― ―
Highlight&Shadow
Control f (±0)  106
n Mode P――147
Movie ROn  150
RC mode QA group A TTL  216
QB group B Off 
QC group C Off 
Q camera fl ash Off 
Flash compensation ±0 (TTL, Auto) 
Flash level 1/1 (Manual) 
#/FP # (Normal) 
a optical signal
strength Low 
Channel 1 
231
EN
Information
8
K Shooting Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
WReset / Custom
Modes Reset ――
―127,
128
Assign to Custom Mode Shooting mode: P
Image quality:
YF+RAW
Recall from Custom Mode ―
Picture Mode C Natural 
98, 129
KKYF (High Res
Shot: IF+RAW)

88, 129
Image Aspect 4:3  87
Digital Tele-converter Off  130
j/Y/i― 71
j/Yo
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off ― 131
Number of Frames 99
Start Waiting Time 00:00:01
Interval Length 00:00:01
Time Lapse Movie Off
Movie
Settings Movie
Resolution FullHD
Frame Rate 10fps
XBracketing Off  132,
132,
133,
134
AE BKT 3f 1.0EV
WB BKT A– BOff
G– M
FL BKT Off
ISO BKT Off
ART BKT Off
Focus BKT Off
Focus Stacking Off
Set number of shots 99
Set focus differential 5
#Charge Time 0 sec ―
HDR Off  137
Multiple
Exposure Number of Frames Off ― 139
Auto Gain Off
Overlay Off
Keystone Comp. Off  141
232
EN
Information
8
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
XAnti-Shock r/
Silent s
Anti-Shock rr 0 sec ―142
Silent ss 0 sec
Noise Reduction sOff
Silent s Mode Settings ――
8Not Allow
AF Illuminator Not Allow
Flash Mode Not Allow
High Res Shot
High Res Shot h0 sec ―143
#Charge Time 0 sec
#RC Mode Off  143,
216
n Video Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
nn Mode Settings n Mode P――147
n Flicker Scan Off  148
n Specifi cation
Settings nKMOVn4K 30p  149
n Noise Filter Standard  144
n Picture Mode Off ―144
n AF/IS Settings n AF Mode C-AF 80, 86,
144
n Image Stabilizer M-IS1
n Button/Dial/Lever 145
n Button
Function K Button Function ISO ――
F Button Function F――
R Function R REC ――
t Function AEL/AFL ――
jY Button
Function Off ――
u Function u――
z Function a――
d Function Direct Function ――
E Function WB
D Function Electronic Zoom ――
l Function AF Stop ――
n Dial Function Pk: F
j: F
――
Ak: F
j: FNo.
――
Sk: F
j: Shutter
――
Mk: FNo.
j: Shutter
――
n Fn Lever Function mode2 ――
n Shutter Function w――
n Elec. Zoom Speed Normal ――
233
EN
Information
8
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
nn Display Settings 146
n Control Settings Live Control,
Live SCP
――
n Info Settings Custom1 (all on
except for Movie
Effect)
――
Time Code
Settings Time Code Mode Drop Frame ――
Count Up Rec Run ――
Starting Time 0:00:00 ――
Movie ROn  150
Recording
Volume Built-in R±0 ――
MIC R±0 ――
R Volume Limiter On ――
Wind Noise Reduction Off ――
Recording Rate 48kHz/16bit ――
R Plug-in Power On ――
PCM Recorder
R Link Camera Rec. Volume Operative ――
Slate Tone Off ―
Synchronized R
Rec. Off ―
n HDMI Output Output Mode Monitor Mode ――146
REC Bit Off ―
Time Code On ―
q Playback Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
qROn  153
Edit Sel. Image RAW Data Edit ――――153
JPEG Edit ―154
Movie Edit ―156
R―122
Image Overlay ―155
Print Order ――――120
Reset Protect ――――158
Reset share Order ――――158
Device Connection ――――201
234
EN
Information
8
d Setup Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
dCard Setup ――――160
X――――27
WEnglish ―――29, 159
sj±0, k±0, Natural ―159
Rec View 0.5 sec ―159
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings Availability On ――207
Connection Password ――――206
Power-off Standby Off ――202
Reset Settings ――――206
Firmware ――――159
G Custom Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GAF/MF
JK AF mode S-AF 
80, 161
K AEL/AFL S-AF mode1  161,
175
C-AF mode2
MF mode1
AF Scanner mode2  161
K C-AF Sensitivity ±0  176
K C-AF Center Start q (All Targets)  177
K C-AF Center Priority 5, 9, or 25 targets  178
KNMode Settings All On  162
AF Area Pointer On1  162
AF Targeting Pad Off  162
N Set Home AF Target Mode,
AF Target Point
 162
N Custom Settings Set 1  162
kNMode 
jI
A6Pos 
B6Pos 
LAF Limiter Off  163
Distance settings Setting 1 
Release Priority On 
AF Illuminator On  163
IFace Priority K―67, 163
AF Focus Adj. * Off  163
* Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not affect saved values.
235
EN
Information
8
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GIPreset MF distance 999.9 m  163
MF Assist Magnify Off ―163,
180
Peaking Off ―
MF Clutch Operative  163
Focus Ring b
Bulb/Time Focusing On 
Reset Lens On 
Button/Dial/Lever
MK Button
Function K Button Function ISO ―107,
164
F Button Function F―
R Function R REC ―
t Function AEL/AFL ―
jY Button
Function j/Y―
u Function u―
z Function z―
d Function N―
E Function Off (j/Y)―
D Function Off (#)―
l Function AF Stop ―
qR Function H―164
K Dial
Function Pk: F
j: Ps
―164
Ak: F
j: FNo.
Sk: F
j: Shutter
M/B k: FNo.
j: Shutter
Menu k: B
j: A/Value
qk: Prev/Next
j: Ga
Dial
Direction Exposure Dial1 ―164
Ps Dial1
K Fn Lever Function mode2 ――164,
181
Fn Lever/Power Lever Fn ――164
K Elec. Zoom Speed Normal ―164
236
EN
Information
8
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GRelease/j/Image Stabilizer
NS-AF Release Priority Off  165
C-AF Release Priority On  165
jL Settings 165,
182
j/♦jMax fps 6fps 
Frame Count Limiter Off
♥jMax fps 10fps
Frame Count Limiter Off
0Pre-shutter Frames 8 shots
Frame Count Limiter 25 shots
jH Settings 165,
182
jMax fps 10fps 
Frame Count Limiter Off
♥jMax fps 30fps
Frame Count Limiter Off
0Max fps 30fps
Pre-shutter Frames 8 shots
Frame Count Limiter 25 shots
Flicker
Reduction Anti-Flicker LV Auto ―165,
184
Anti-Flicker Shooting Off ―
OK Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO 
86, 165
j Image Stabilizer Fps Priority ―165
Half Way Rls With IS On ――165
Lens I.S. Priority Off  165
237
EN
Information
8
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GDisp/8/PC
PK Control
Settings BLive Guide ――166,
186
P/A/S/M/B Live SCP ―
ART Art Menu ――
SCN Scene Menu ――
G/Info
Settings q Info Image Only, Overall  166,
188
qa Info All On ――
LV-Info Image Only,
Custom1 (u),
Custom2 (Level
Gauge)
―
G Settings 25, Calendar ―
Picture Mode Settings All On ―166
j/Y Settings ♥o, T, ♥T, p,
S, ♥S, q, X,
c, h
―166
Multi Function Settings All on except WB
and ISO
―166
QLive View
Boost Manual Shooting Off  167
Bulb/Time On2
Live Composite Off
Others Off
Art LV Mode mode1 ―167
LV Close Up
Settings LV Close Up Mode mode2 ―167
Live View Boost Off ―
qa Default Setting Recently ――167
z Settings z Lock Off ―167
Live View Boost Off ―
RGrid Settings Display Color Preset 1 ―168
Displayed Grid Off ―
Apply Settings to EVF On ―
Peaking
Settings Peaking Color Red ―168
Highlight Intensity Normal
Image Brightness Adj. Off
Histogram
Settings Highlight 255 ―168
Shadow 0
Mode Guide Off ―168
Selfi e Assist On ――168,
190
S8On  168
HDMI Output Size 1080p ――168,
191
HDMI Control Off――
Output Frame Rate 60p Priority ―――
USB Mode Auto ― 168
238
EN
Information
8
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GExp/ISO/BULB/p
TExposure
Shift p±0 ―169
J
5
EV Step 1/3EV  169
ISO Step 1/3EV  169
ISO-Auto Set Upper Limit / Default Upper Limit: 6400
Default: 200
 169
Lowest S/S Setting Auto 
ISO-Auto All ―169
K Noise Filter Standard  169
Noise Reduct. Auto  169
UBulb/Time Timer 8 min  170
Bulb/Time Monitor −7―170
Live Bulb Off ―170,
192
Live Time 0.5 sec ―170,
192
Composite Settings 1 sec ―47, 170,
193
K Flicker Scan Off  170,
194
VMetering p
82, 170
AEL Metering Auto  170
N Spot
Metering Spot On  170
Spot Highlight On 
Spot Shadow On 
#Custom
W#X-Sync. 1/250  170,
195
#Slow Limit 1/60  170,
195
x+FOff 170
#+WB W―170
239
EN
Information
8
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GK/WB/Color
XK Set K1: YSF
K2: YF
K3: YN
K4: XN
 171,
196
Pixel Count Xiddle 3200×2400  171,
196
Wmall 1280×960
Shading Comp. Off  171
WB Auto A±0, G±0 
83, 171
All xAll Set A±0, G±0 ―171
All Reset ――――
W Keep Warm Color On  171
Color Space sRGB  105,
171
Record/Erase
YFile Name Reset ―172
Edit Filename ――172
dpi Settings 350dpi ―172
Copyright
Settings Copyright Info. Off ―172
Artist Name ――――
Copyright Name ――――
Lens Info Settings* Off ――172,
196
ZQuick Erase Off  173
RAW+JPEG Erase RAW+JPEG  173
Priority Set No  173
EVF
aEVF Auto Switch On ――173
EVF Adjust EVF Auto Luminance Off ―173
EVF Adjust j±0, k±0
EVF Style Style 3 ――173,
197
V Info Settings Basic Information,
Custom1 (u),
Custom2 (Level
Gauge)
―173
EVF Grid
Settings Display Color Preset 1 ―173
Displayed Grid Off ―
V Half Way Level On ―173
S-OVF Off  173
* [Reset] (Full) and [Reset] (Basic) do not reset the info for individual lenses.
240
EN
Information
8
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GK Utility
bPixel Mapping ――――174,
223
Press-and-
hold Time End LV a0.7 sec ―174
Reset LV a Frame 0.7 sec ―
End 60.7 sec ―
Reset 6 Frame 0.7 sec ―
Reset F0.7 sec ―
Reset x0.7 sec ―
Reset 70.7 sec ―
Reset c0.7 sec ―
Reset N0.7 sec ―
Call EVF Auto Switch 0.7 sec ―
End qa0.7 sec ―
Switch L0.7 sec ―
Insert Slate Tone 0.7 sec ―
End D0.7 sec ―
Reset D0.7 sec ―
Switch G Lock 0.7 sec ―
Call BKT Settings 0.7 sec ―
End Flicker Scan 0.7 sec ―
Level Adjust ――
―174
Touchscreen Settings On ――174
Menu Recall Recall ―174
Fisheye Compensation Off―174,
198
cBacklit LCD Hold  174
Sleep 1 min  174
Auto Power Off 4h  174
Quick Sleep Mode Off ―174
Backlit LCD 8 sec
Sleep 10 sec
Certifi cation ――――174
241
EN
Information
8
Record mode and fi le size/number of storable still pictures
Memory Card Capacity: Photos
Figures are for an 16 GB SD card used to record photos with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Record mode Image size
(Pixel Count) Compression File
format File size (MB) Number of
storable still
pictures
IF+RAW
10400×7792 Loss-less
compression ORF 125
87
8160×6120 1/4 JPEG 21.7
5200×3904 Loss-less
compression ORI 21.5
JF+RAW
10400×7792 Loss-less
compression ORF
125
89
5760×4320 1/4 JPEG
10.9
5200×3904 Loss-less
compression ORI
21.5
IF8160×6120 1/4 JPEG
21.7 634
JF5760×4320 1/4 JPEG
10.9 1261
RAW 5240×3192 Loss-less
compression ORF
21.5 696
YSF
5184×3888
1/2.7
JPEG
13.1 1054
YF1/4
8.9 1550
YN1/8
4.6 3013
XSF
3200×2400
1/2.7
5.1 2697
XF1/4
3.6 3906
XN1/8
1.9 7397
XSF
1920×1440
1/2.7
2 6975
XF1/4
1.4 9765
XN1/8
0.9 16836
WSF
1280×960
1/2.7
1 13562
WF1/4
0.8 18083
WN1/8
0.5 28721
WSF
1024×768
1/2.7
0.8 18779
WF1/4
0.6 24413
WN1/8
0.3 61032
• The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or not
print reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the number
of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you take
pictures or erase stored images.
• The actual fi le size varies according to the subject.
• The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999.
242
EN
Information
8
Memory Card Capacity: Movies
Figures are for a 32 GB SDHC memory card.
Frame size Compression Frame rate Capacity (approx.)
C4K — 24p 17 minutes
4K — 30p, 25p, 24p 40 minutes
FHD
A-I 30p, 25p, 24p 20 minutes
SF 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
1 hour 16 minutes
F 2 hours 7 minutes
N 3 hours 22 minutes
HD
A-I
60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
40 minutes
SF 2 hours 25 minutes
F 4 hours 11 minutes
N 5 hours 32 minutes
• Figures are for footage recorded at the maximum frame rate. The actual bit rate varies
with the frame rate and scene recorded.
• Individual movie fi les can be up to 4 GB in size. A new fi le is created when the size of the
current fi le reaches 4 GB.
• Individual movies can be no more than 29 minutes in length.
243
EN
Information
8
Specifi cations
Camera
Product type
Product type Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard lens
system
Lens M.ZUIKO DIGITAL, Micro Four Thirds System Lens
Lens mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Equivalent focal length on
a 35 mm fi lm camera Approx. twice the focal length of the lens
Image pickup device
Product type 4/3” Live MOS sensor
Total no. of pixels Approx. 21.77 million pixels
No. of effective pixels Approx. 20.37 million pixels
Screen size 17.4 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V)
Aspect ratio 1.33 (4:3)
Viewfi nder
Type Electronic viewfi nder with eye sensor
No. of pixels Approx. 2.36 million dots
Magnifi cation 100%
Eye point Approx. 27 mm (−1 m−1)
Live view
Sensor Uses Live MOS sensor
Magnifi cation 100%
Monitor
Product type 3.0" TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen
Total no. of pixels Approx. 1.04 million dots (aspect ratio 3:2)
Shutter
Product type Computerized focal-plane shutter
Shutter speed 1/8000 - 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography
Auto focus
Product type Hi-Speed Imager AF
Focusing points 121 points
Selection of focusing point Auto, Optional
Exposure control
Metering system TTL metering system (imager metering)
Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot metering
Metered range −2 to 20 EV (f/2.8, ISO 100 equivalent)
Shooting modes B: AUTO; P: Program AE (program shift available);
A: Aperture priority AE; S: Shutter-priority AE; M: Manual;
B: Bulb (bulb, time, and composite); C: Custom Mode; n: Movie;
ART: Art Filter; SCN: Scene mode
ISO sensitivity LOW, 200 - 25600 (1/3, 1 EV step)
Exposure compensation ±5.0 EV (1/3, 1/2, 1 EV step)
244
EN
Information
8
White balance
Product type Image pickup device
Mode setting Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB (camera can
store up to 4 settings)
Recording
Memory SD, SDHC and SDXC
UHS-II compatible
Recording system Digital recording, JPEG (DCF2.0), RAW Data
Applicable standards Exif 2.3, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Sound with still pictures Wave format
Movie MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio Stereo linear PCM, 16 bit; sampling frequency 48 kHz (wave format)
Stereo linear PCM, 24 bit; sampling frequency 96 kHz (wave format)
Playback
Display format Single-frame playback/Close-up playback/Index display/Calendar display
Drive
Drive mode Single-frame shooting/Sequential shooting/Self-timer
Sequential shooting Up to 10 fps (T)
Up to 30 fps (♥T, p)
Self-timer Operation time: 12 sec./2 sec./Customized
Energy saving function Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute, Power OFF: 4 hours
(This function can be customized.)
Flash
Flash control mode TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-fl ash mode)/MANUAL
X-Sync. 1/250 s or slower
Wireless LAN
Compatible standard IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Bluetooth®
Compatible standard Bluetooth Version 4.2 BLE
External connector
Micro-USB connector/HDMI micro connector (type D)
Power supply
Battery Lithium-ion Battery ×1
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions 125.3 mm (W) × 85.2 mm (H) × 49.7 mm (D) (4.9" × 3.4" × 2.0")
(excluding protrusions)
Weight Approx. 414 g (0.9 Ib.) (including battery and memory card)
Operating environment
Temperature
−10 °C - 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/ −20 °C - 60 °C (−4 °F - 140 °F)
(storage)
Humidity 30% - 90% (operation)/10% - 90% (storage)
Water resistance Type: IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1 (applies if camera is used
with Olympus water-resistant lens)
245
EN
Information
8
Flash
MODEL NO. FL-LM3
Guide number 9.1 (ISO100•m)
12.7 (ISO200•m)
Firing angle Covers the picture angle of a 12 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm
format)
Dimensions Approx. 43.6 mm (W) × 49.4 mm (H) × 39 mm (D) (1.7" × 1.9" × 1.5")
Weight Approx. 51 g (1.8 oz.)
Splash resistance Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1
Lithium-ion battery
MODEL NO. BLS-50
Product type Rechargeable Lithium ion battery
Nominal voltage DC 7.2 V
Nominal capacity 1210 mAh
No. of charge and
discharge times Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions)
Ambient temperature 0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (charging)
Dimensions
Approx. 35.5 mm (W) × 12.8 mm (H) × 55 mm (D) (1.4" × 0.5" × 2.2")
Weight Approx. 46 g (0.1 Ib.)
Lithium-ion charger
MODEL NO. BCS-5
Rated input AC 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Rated output DC 8.35 V, 400 mA
Charging time Approx. 3 hours 30 minutes (room temperature)
Ambient temperature 0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/
−20 °C - 60 °C (−4 °F - 140 °F) (storage)
Dimensions Approx. 62 mm (W) × 38 mm (H) × 83 mm (D) (2.4" × 1.5" × 3.3")
Weight (without AC cable) Approx. 70 g (0.15 Ib.)
• The supplied power cable is for use exclusively with this camera. Do not use with other
equipment. Do not use the camera with cables for other equipment.
• The appearance and specifi cations of this product are subject to change without notice
or obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
• Visit the OLYMPUS website for the latest specifi cations.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Defi nition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
246
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
9
9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED OLYMPUS SERVICE PERSONNEL.
An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the
product.
WARNING If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, serious injury or death may result.
CAUTION If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, injury may result.
NOTICE If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, damage to the equipment may result.
WARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
General Precautions
Read All Instructions — Before you use the
product, read all operating instructions. Save all
manuals and documentation for future reference.
Power Source — Connect this product only to
the power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury,
never insert a metal object into the product.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product from
the wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid or
aerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent to
clean this product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near
any heat source such as a radiator, heat register,
stove, or any type of equipment or appliance that
generates heat, including stereo amplifi ers.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid
damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by Olympus.
Location — To avoid damage to the product,
mount the product securely on a stable tripod,
stand, or bracket.
WARNING
• Do not use the camera near fl ammable or
explosive gases.
• Rest your eyes periodically when using
the viewfi nder.
Failure to observe this precaution could result
in eyestrain, nausea, or sensations similar to
motion sickness. The length and frequency
of the required rest varies with the individual;
use your own judgement. If you feel tired
or unwell, avoid using the viewfi nder and if
necessary consult a physician.
• Do not use the fl ash and LED (including
AF illuminator) on people (infants, small
children, etc.) at close range.
• You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) away
from the faces of your subjects. Firing the
fl ash too close to the subject’s eyes could
cause a momentary loss of vision.
• Do not look at the sun or strong lights
with the camera.
247
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
9
• Keep young children, infants away from
the camera.
• Always use and store the camera out of
the reach of young children and infants to
prevent the following dangerous situations
which could cause serious injury:
• Becoming entangled in the camera
strap, causing strangulation.
• Accidentally swallowing the battery,
cards or other small parts.
• Accidentally fi ring the fl ash into their
own eyes or those of another child.
• Accidentally being injured by the
moving parts of the camera.
• Should you notice that the charger is
emitting smoke, heat, or an unusual noise
or smell, immediately cease use and
unplug the charger from the power outlet,
and then contact an authorized distributor
or service center.
• Stop using the camera immediately if
you notice any unusual odors, noise, or
smoke around it.
• Never remove the batteries with bare
hands, which may cause a fi re or burn
your hands.
• Never hold or operate the camera with wet
hands.
This may cause overheating, exploding,
burning, electrical shocks, or malfunctions.
• Do not leave the camera in places where
it may be subject to extremely high
temperatures.
• Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate
and, in some circumstances, cause
the camera to catch fi re. Do not use
the charger if it is covered (such as a
blanket). This could cause overheating,
resulting in fi re.
• Handle the camera with care to avoid
getting a low temperature burn.
• When the camera contains metal
parts, overheating can result in a low-
temperature burn. Pay attention to the
following:
• When used for a long period, the
camera will get hot. If you hold on
to the camera in this state, a low-
temperature burn may be caused.
• In places subject to extremely cold
temperatures, the temperature of the
camera’s body may be lower than the
environmental temperature. If possible,
wear gloves when handling the camera
in cold temperatures.
• To protect the high-precision technology
contained in this product, never leave the
camera in the places listed below, no matter if
in use or storage:
• Places where temperatures and/or
humidity are high or go through extreme
changes. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked
cars, or near other heat sources (stove,
radiator, etc.) or humidifi ers.
• In sandy or dusty environments.
• Near fl ammable items or explosives.
• In wet places, such as bathrooms or in
the rain.
• In places prone to strong vibrations.
• The camera uses a lithium-ion battery
specifi ed by Olympus. Charge the battery
with the specifi ed charger. Do not use any
other chargers.
• Never incinerate or heat batteries in
microwaves, on hot plates, or in pressure
vessels, etc.
• Never leave the camera on or near
electromagnetic devices.
This may cause overheating, burning, or
exploding.
• Do not connect terminals with any metallic
objects.
• Take precautions when carrying or storing
batteries to prevent them from coming into
contact with any metal objects such as
jewelry, pins, fasteners, keys, etc.
The short circuit may cause overheating,
exploding, or burning, which burn or damage
you.
• To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging
their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt
to disassemble a battery or modify it in any
way, solder, etc.
• If battery fl uid gets into your eyes, fl ush
your eyes immediately with clear, cold
running water and seek medical attention
immediately.
• If you cannot remove the battery from the
camera, contact an authorized distributor
or service center. Do not try to remove the
battery by force.
Damage to the battery exterior (scratches,
etc.) may produce heat or an explosion.
• Always store batteries out of the reach of
small children and pets. If they accidentally
swallow a battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
• To prevent batteries from leaking,
overheating, or causing a fi re or explosion,
use only batteries recommended for use with
this product.
• If rechargeable batteries have not been
recharged within the specifi ed time, stop
charging them and do not use them.
• Do not use batteries with scratches or
damage to the casing, and do not scratch
the battery.
248
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
9
• Never subject batteries to strong shocks or
continuous vibration by dropping or hitting.
This may cause exploding, overheating, or
burning.
• If a battery leaks, has unusual odor, becomes
discolored or deformed, or becomes
abnormal in any other way during operation,
stop using the camera, and keep away from
fi re immediately.
• If a battery leaks fl uid onto your clothing
or skin, remove the clothing and fl ush the
affected area with clean, running cold water
immediately. If the fl uid burns your skin, seek
medical attention immediately.
• Never use lithium-ion batteries in a low-
temperature environment. Doing so may
cause generation of heat, ignition, or
explosion.
• The Olympus lithium-ion battery is designed
to be used only for the Olympus digital
camera. Do not use the battery to other
devices.
• Do not allow children or animals/pets to
handle or transport batteries (prevent
dangerous behaviour such as licking,
putting in mouth or chewing).
Use Only Dedicated Rechargeable
Battery and Battery Charger
We strongly recommend that you use only the
genuine Olympus dedicated rechargeable battery
and battery charger with this camera.
Using a non-genuine rechargeable battery and/
or battery charger may result in fi re or personal
injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage
to the battery. Olympus does not assume any
liability for accidents or damage that may result
from the use of a battery and/or battery charger
that are not genuine Olympus accessories.
CAUTION
• Do not cover the fl ash with a hand while
fi ring.
• Never store batteries where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected to
high temperatures in a hot vehicle, near a
heat source, etc.
• Keep batteries dry at all times.
• The battery may become hot during
prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do not
remove it immediately after using the camera.
• This camera uses one Olympus lithium-ion
battery. Use the specifi ed genuine battery.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Please recycle batteries to help save our
planet’s resources. When you throw away
dead batteries, be sure to cover their
terminals and always observe local laws and
regulations.
NOTICE
• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or
humid places.
• Use SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards only.
Never use other types of cards.
If you accidently insert another type of card
into the camera, contact an authorized
distributor or service center. Do not try to
remove the card by force.
• Regularly back up important data to a
computer or other storage device to prevent
accidental loss.
• OLYMPUS accepts no liability for any loss of
data associated with this device.
• Be careful with the strap when you carry the
camera. It could easily catch on stray objects
and cause serious damage.
• Before transporting the camera, remove
a tripod and all other non-OLYMPUS
accessories.
• Never drop the camera or subject it to severe
shocks or vibrations.
• When attaching the camera to or removing
it from a tripod, rotate the tripod screw, not
the camera.
• Do not touch electric contacts on cameras.
• Do not leave the camera pointed directly
at the sun. This may cause lens or shutter
curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on
the image pickup device, or may possibly
cause fi res.
• Do not leave the viewfi nder exposed to a
strong light source or direct sunlight. The
heat may damage the viewfi nder.
• Do not push or pull severely on the lens.
• Be sure to remove any water droplets or
other moisture from the product before
replacing the battery or opening or closing
covers.
• Before storing the camera for a long period,
remove the batteries. Select a cool, dry
location for storage to prevent condensation
or mold from forming inside the camera. After
storage, test the camera by turning it on and
pressing the shutter button to make sure that
it is operating normally.
• The camera may malfunction if it is used in
a location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic fi eld, radio waves, or high
voltage, such as near a TV set, microwave,
video game, loud speakers, large monitor
unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers.
In such cases, turn the camera off and on
again before further operation.
• Always observe the operating environment
restrictions described in the camera’s
manual.
249
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
9
• Insert the battery carefully as described in the
operating instructions.
• Before loading, always inspect the battery
carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or
any other abnormality.
• Always unload the battery from the camera
before storing the camera for a long period.
• When storing the battery for a long period,
select a cool location for storage.
• Power consumption by the camera varies
depending on which functions are used.
• During the conditions described below, power
is consumed continuously and the battery
becomes exhausted quickly.
• The zoom is used repeatedly.
• The shutter button is pressed halfway
repeatedly in shooting mode, activating
the auto focus.
• A picture is displayed on the monitor for
an extended period of time.
• Using an exhausted battery may cause the
camera to turn off without displaying the
battery level warning.
• If the battery’s terminals get wet or greasy,
camera contact failure may result. Wipe the
battery well with a dry cloth before use.
• Always charge a battery when using it for
the fi rst time, or if it has not been used for a
long period.
• When operating the camera with battery
power at low temperatures, try to keep
the camera and spare battery as warm as
possible. A battery that has run down at
low temperatures may be restored after it is
warmed at room temperature.
• Before going on a long trip, and especially
before traveling abroad, purchase extra
batteries. A recommended battery may be
diffi cult to obtain while traveling.
Using the wireless LAN/
Bluetooth® functions
• Turn off the camera in hospitals and other
locations where medical equipment is
present.
The radio waves from the camera may
adversely affect medical equipment, causing
a malfunction that results in an accident. Be
sure to disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions in the vicinity of medical equipment
(P. 207).
• Turn off the camera when onboard
aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder
safe operation of the aircraft. Be sure to
disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® functions
onboard aircraft (P. 207).
Monitor
• Do not push the monitor forcibly; otherwise
the image may become vague, resulting in
a playback mode failure or damage to the
monitor.
• A strip of light may appear on the top/bottom
of the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
• When a subject is viewed diagonally in the
camera, the edges may appear zigzagged on
the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it will
be less noticeable in playback mode.
• In places subject to low temperatures, the
monitor may take a long time to turn on or its
color may change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold
places, it is a good idea to occasionally place
it in a warm place. The monitor exhibiting
poor performance due to low temperatures
will recover in normal temperatures.
• The monitor of this product is manufactured
with high-quality accuracy, however, there
may be a stuck or dead pixel on the monitor.
These pixels do not have any infl uence
on the image to be saved. Because of the
characteristics, the unevenness of the color
or brightness may also be found depending
on the angle, but this is due to the structure
of the monitor. This is not a malfunction.
Legal and Other Notices
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages, or
benefi t expected by using this unit lawfully,
or any request from a third person, which
are caused by the inappropriate use of this
product.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages or any
benefi t expected by using this unit lawfully
which are caused by erasing picture data.
Disclaimer of Warranty
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties, either expressed or implied, by
or concerning any content of these written
materials or software, and in no event
shall be liable for any implied warranty of
merchantability or fi tness for any particular
purpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited
to damages for loss of business profi ts,
business interruption and loss of business
information) arising from the use or inability
to use these written materials or software
or equipment. Some countries do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of liability for
consequential or incidental damages or of
the implied warranty, so the above limitations
may not apply to you.
• Olympus reserves all rights to this manual.
250
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
9
Warning
Unauthorized photographing or use of
copyrighted material may violate applicable
copyright laws. Olympus assumes no
responsibility for unauthorized photographing,
use or other acts that infringe upon the rights of
copyright owners.
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of these written
materials or this software may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying and
recording or the use of any type of information
storage and retrieval system, without the prior
written permission of Olympus. No liability
is assumed with respect to the use of the
information contained in these written materials
or software, or for damages resulting from
the use of the information contained therein.
Olympus reserves the right to alter the features
and contents of this publication or software
without obligation or advance notice.
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac, OS X, and macOS are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• Apical logo is a registered
trademark of Apical Limited.
• Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds, and the
Micro Four Thirds and Four Thirds logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the
OLYMPUS CORPORATION in Japan, the
United States, the countries of the European
Union, and other countries.
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
logo is a certifi cation mark
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by the
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by OLYMPUS CORPORATION is
under license.
• The standards for camera fi le systems
referred to in this manual are the “Design
Rule for Camera File System/DCF” standards
stipulated by the Japan Electronics and
Information Technology Industries Association
(JEITA).
• All other company and product names are
registered trademarks and/or trademarks of
their respective owners.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED
FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.
MPEGLA.COM
The software in this camera may include third
party software. Any third party software is subject
to the terms and conditions, imposed by the
owners or licensors of that software, under which
software is provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software
notices, if any, may be found in the software
notice PDF fi le stored at
http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/
digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm
251
EN
Additions/modifi cations by fi rmware update
10
10
The following functions are added/modifi ed by fi rmware update.
Additions/modifi cations by the fi rmware version 1.1
g
EVF Auto Switch 251
Additions/modifi cations by the fi rmware version 1.1
EVF Auto Switch
The Custom Menu (MENU G a [EVF Auto Switch]) now offers a choice of
[On1] and [On2].
Option Description
EVF Auto Switch [Off]: The viewfi nder display does not light automatically when
you put your eye to the viewfi nder. Press the u button to switch
between the viewfi nder and monitor displays.
[On1]: The viewfi nder display lights automatically when you put your
eye to the viewfi nder. Pressing the u button displays [EVF Auto
Switch] options.
[On2]: Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the viewfi nder display
on only if the monitor is closed. Pressing the u button displays
[EVF Auto Switch] options.
Default settings
The default settings for new functions and the modifi ed default settings are as follows.
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].
G Custom Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GaEVF Auto Switch On1 ――173
Additions/modifi cations by fi rmware
update
252
EN
Symbols
0 (Protect) .....................................118
8 (Beep sound) ...............................168
n Mode (movie exposure mode) .....147
P (Trimming) ...................................154
qR Function ..................................164
qa Default Setting.........................189
#RC Mode ........................................216
#Slow Limit.......................................195
#X-Sync. ..........................................195
#+WB ...............................................170
G (Index display/Calendar display) . 117
G/Info Settings ................................188
j/Y Settings ..................................166
jH Settings ............................165, 182
jL Settings .............................165, 182
j Image Stabilizer ..........................165
s (Monitor brightness adjustment) .159
I/H (Underwater wide/Underwater
macro) ...........................................109
(Single-frame erase) .....................119
NMode Settings ..............................162
N Custom Settings .........................162
N Set Home ............................162, 179
N Spot Metering .............................170
W (Language) ...........................29, 159
v (Image selection) ......................... 119
I (Face priority AF) ............................67
a (Close-up playback) .....................117
R (Image rotation) ...........................153
V Half Way Level .............................173
V Info Settings .................................173
W Keep Warm Color .................84, 171
x+F ...............................................170
z Settings .........................................167
A
A (Aperture priority mode) ..................39
Accessories ...............................214, 219
AdobeRGB ........................................105
AEL/AFL ............................................175
AEL Metering .....................................170
AE lock ........................................70, 175
AF Area Pointer .................................162
AF Focus Adj. ....................................163
AF Illuminator ....................................163
AF Limiter ..........................................163
AF Mode ..............................................80
Movie ..............................................144
AF Scanner........................................161
AF Targeting Pad ...............................162
AF Target Point ....................................66
AF tracking ..........................................81
All x ...............................................171
Anti-Flicker LV ...........................165, 184
Anti-Flicker Shooting .................165, 185
Anti-shock shooting .....................73, 142
ART (Art fi lter) .....................................55
Art fade ................................................59
Art fi lter ................................................55
Art LV Mode .......................................167
Aspect ratio..........................................87
Assign to Custom Mode ....................128
Audio recording
Movie ......................................150, 151
Still image .......................................122
AUTO mode (B) ................................49
Auto Power Off ..................................174
Available recording time ....................242
B
Backlight HDR .....................................53
Backlit LCD ........................................174
Battery charge .....................................18
Battery level .........................................26
Beep sound .......................................168
Bit rate .........................................90, 149
Bluetooth® ........................................200
Bracketing..........................................132
Bulb .....................................................45
Bulb/Time Focusing ...................163, 180
Bulb/Time Monitor .............................170
Index
253
EN
Bulb/Time Timer ................................170
Button function...................................107
Movie ..............................................145
C
C-AFK (AF tracking) ........................81
C-AF Center Priority ..................161, 178
C-AF Center Start ......................161, 177
C-AF (Continuous AF) .........................80
C-AF Release Priority ........................165
C-AF Sensitivity .........................161, 176
Calendar display ........................117, 189
Card .............................................21, 211
Card Setup ........................................160
Certifi cation........................................174
Close-up playback .............................117
Color Creator .....................................100
Color Filter .........................................103
Color Space ...............................105, 171
Composite Settings .....................47, 193
Compression rate ................90, 196, 241
Computer ........................................... 208
Connection
Computer ........................................208
Smartphone ....................................200
Continuous AF .....................................80
Contrast ............................................. 101
Control Settings
Movie ..............................................146
Still image ...............................166, 186
Copyright Settings .............................172
Custom Menu ............................161, 234
Custom Self-timer ................................73
Custom Settings ................................162
D
Date/time setting (X) ..........................27
Dial Direction .....................................164
Dial Function
Movie ..............................................145
Still image .......................................164
Digital Tele-converter .........................130
dpi Settings ........................................172
DPOF .................................................120
E
Edit ....................................................153
Edit Filename.....................................172
Effect (i-Enhance) ..............................104
Electronic Zoom.................................112
Elec. Zoom Speed
Movie ..............................................145
Still image .......................................164
Erase
All images .......................................160
Selected images ............................. 119
Single-frame ...................................119
EVF Adjust .........................................173
EVF Auto Switch ................................173
EVF Grid Settings ..............................173
EVF Style...........................................197
EV Step .............................................169
Exif data.............................................172
Exposure compensation ......................64
Exposure Shift ...................................169
External fl ash units ............................215
Eye priority AF .....................................67
F
Face priority AF ...................................67
Fast-motion movie ...............................92
File format..........................................241
File Name ..........................................172
File size .............................................241
Firmware ............................................159
Fisheye Compensation ......................198
Flash .................................................... 93
Flash intensity control (x) .................97
Flicker Reduction .......................165, 184
Flicker Scan
Movie ..............................................148
Still image .......................................194
Fn Lever Function
Movie ..............................................145
Still image ...............................164, 181
Fn Lever/Power Lever .......................164
Focus mode .........................................80
Focus Ring ........................................163
254
EN
Format ...............................................160
Frame Rate..................................90, 149
G
GPS log .............................................205
Gradation ........................................... 102
Grid Settings ......................................168
Grip .................................................... 214
H
Half Way Rls With IS .........................165
HDMI .........................................168, 191
HDMI Output......................................146
HDR (High Dynamic Range) .............137
Highlight&Shadow Control.................106
High Res Shot (High resolution shooting)
76, 143
Histogram display ................................33
Histogram Settings ............................168
I
IC recorder.........................................151
Image aspect .......................................87
Image Overlay ...................................155
Image quality
Movie (nK) ...........................89, 149
Still image (KK) ................... 88, 129
Image quality settings
Movie (n Specifi cation Settings) ...144
Still image (K Set) ................171, 196
Image size
Movie ..............................................149
Still image .........................88, 196, 241
Image Stabilizer ...........................86, 165
Movie ........................................86, 144
Image transfer to smartphone ...........203
Index display..............................117, 189
INFO button ........................33, 115, 186
Information display ..............................30
Playback ......................................... 114
Info Settings
G/Info Settings ..............................188
V Info Settings ..............................173
In-Movie Image Capture ....................156
Installation .........................................209
Interchangeable lenses .....................212
ISO-Auto ............................................ 169
ISO-Auto Set .....................................169
ISO sensitivity ................................70, 80
ISO Step ............................................169
K
Keystone Comp. ................................141
L
Language setting (W) ...............29, 159
Lens Info Settings ..............................196
Lens I.S. Priority ................................165
Level Adjust .......................................174
Level Gauge ........................................33
Lever function ....................................181
Light box display ................................188
Live Bulb ......................................45, 192
Live composite photography................47
Live control ................................187, 229
Live Guide ...........................................49
Live Time .....................................45, 192
Live View Boost .................................167
Long exposure (BULB/TIME) ..............45
LV Close Up Settings .........................167
LV-Info ...............................................189
LV super control panel ...........77, 79, 229
M
M (Manual mode) ................................43
Manual focus .......................................80
Manual focus clutch (MF clutch) ........213
Menu..........................................125, 229
Menu Recall.......................................174
Metering...............................................82
MF (AF/MF toggle) ............................109
MF Assist ...........................................180
MF Clutch ..........................................213
MF (Manual focus)...............................80
Mode Guide .......................................168
Monochrome Color ............................104
Movie R .............................................150
Movie Effect .........................................59
255
EN
Movie exposure mode .......................147
Movie playback ..................................118
Movie recording .............................58, 59
Movie Tele-converter ...........................59
Movie Trimming .................................157
Multi echo ............................................59
Multi Function ....................................113
Multi Function Settings ......................166
Multiple Exposure ..............................139
N
Noise Filter ........................................169
Noise Reduct. ....................................169
Number of storable still pictures ........241
O
OI.Share ............................................200
Old fi lm ................................................59
Olympus Workspace .........................209
On-board charging...............................19
One shot echo .....................................59
One-touch white balance (k) ....84, 108
P
P (Program mode) ..............................37
PC software .......................................209
Peaking......................................110, 180
Peaking Settings................................168
Picture Mode ...............................98, 129
Picture Mode Settings .......................166
Pixel Count ........................171, 196, 241
Pixel Mapping ....................................223
Playback
Movie ...................................... 116, 118
Still image ....................................... 116
Playback Menu ..........................153, 233
Position information ...........................205
PreMF (Preset MF) ..............................81
Preset MF ............................................81
Preset MF distance............................163
Press-and-hold Time .........................174
Preview .............................................. 108
Priority Set .........................................173
Pro Capture shooting...........................74
Program shift (Ps) ..............................38
Protect ............................................... 118
Ps (Program shift) ..............................38
Q
Quick Erase .......................................173
Quick Sleep Mode .............................174
R
RAW Data Edit ..................................153
RAW image .........................................88
RAW+JPEG Erase ............................173
RC Mode (#RC Mode) .....................216
Rec View ...........................................159
Remote shooting ...............................204
Reset .................................................127
Reset Lens ........................................163
Reset Protect .....................................158
Reset share Order .............................158
Rotate ................................................117
S
S (Shutter priority mode) .....................41
S-AFb (Single AF and Manual focus) ..
80
S-AF Release Priority ........................165
S-AF (Single AF)..................................80
Saturation ..........................................101
Scene mode ........................................50
SCN mode ..........................................50
SD card..............................................211
Formatting the card .........................160
Selfi e Assist .......................................190
Self-timer .................................71, 73, 87
Sequential shooting .......................71, 87
Setup Menu ...............................159, 234
Shading Comp. ..................................171
Share Order .......................................119
Sharpness .........................................101
Shooting
Movie ................................................59
Still image .........................................34
Shooting Menu ..........................127, 231
Shooting modes...................................34
256
EN
Silent shooting .............................74, 142
Single AF .............................................80
Sleep ...................................................26
Slow motion movie ..............................92
S-OVF ................................................173
sRGB ................................................. 105
Storage .............................................. 208
Super control panel ...............77, 79, 229
Super Spot AF .....................................68
T
Test Picture ........................................109
Time .....................................................45
Time Code Settings ...........................146
Time Lapse Movie .............................131
Time lapse shooting ..........................131
Touch AF..............................................36
Touch screen operations .............36, 123
Touchscreen Settings ........................174
TV ...................................................... 191
U
Underwater wide/Underwater macro
(I/H) ........................................109
USB connection .................................208
USB Mode .........................................168
User registration ....................................9
V
Video Menu ...............................144, 232
W
WB ............................................... 83, 171
White balance ..............................83, 171
White balance compensation ..............85
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings ....................160
Wireless LAN .....................................200
Wireless remote control fl ash ............216
Z
Zoom frame AF ....................................68
WD532701
date of issue 2019.10.
1 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Olympus E-M5 Mark III bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Olympus E-M5 Mark III in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 5.34 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info